Download Print this page

Keysight X Series User Reference

Keysight X Series User Reference

Signal analyzers spectrum mode

Hide thumbs Also See for X Series:

User & programmers manual (3096 pages)

,

Programmer's reference manual (2650 pages)

,

Measurement manual (225 pages)

page of 2852

/ 2852
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

X-Series Signal Analyzers

Spectrum Analyzer Mode

M9410A M9411A M9415A M9416A

N9000B N9010B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9032B N9038B N9040B N9041B

N9042B N9048B

USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Chapters

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the X Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Keysight X Series

Page 1 X-Series Signal Analyzers Spectrum Analyzer Mode M9410A M9411A M9415A M9416A N9000B N9010B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9032B N9038B N9040B N9041B N9042B N9048B USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE...
Page 2 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A to US government customers under its PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT SHALL Keysight Technologies, Inc. as governed by standard commercial license, which is NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR United States and international copyright...
Page 3 X-Series Signal Analyzers Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents Spectrum Analyzer ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.2 Additional Documentation 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog 2.1.1.1 Mode 2.1.1.2 Application Mode Remote Commands Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Table Of Contents 2.3.1 Window Title 2.3.2 Measurement Data 2.3.3 Annotation Hotspot 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1 Right-Click Menu 2.4.1.1 Add to User Menu 2.4.1.2 Help on this setting 2.4.1.3 Show SCPI Command 2.4.1.4 Add to SCPI Recorder 2.4.1.5 Start/Stop SCPI Recorder 2.4.1.6 Show SCPI Recorder 2.4.2 User Menu 2.5 Cancel key...
Page 5 Table Of Contents 2.17.8 Use Case: Displaying Marker and Peak Tables 2.17.9 View Editor Remote Commands 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18.1 Select Screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) 2.19 Fullscreen 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.1 Measurement Commands 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2.1 Views 3.2.1.1 Normal 3.2.1.2 Spectrogram...
Page 6 Table Of Contents Max Mixer Level Max Mixer Lvl Rules 3.2.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Range Adjust Range for Min Clipping Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping Peak-to-Average Ratio Mixer Lvl Offset 3.2.3.4 Signal Path Presel Center Preselector Adjust Internal Preamp µW Path Control Software Preselection SW Preselection Type SW Preselection BW...
Page 7 Table Of Contents Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Frequency Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.2.5.3 View View User View Restore Layout to Default Save Layout as New View Re-Save User View Rename User View Delete User View Delete All User Views View Editor Remote Commands View Listing Query...
Page 8 Table Of Contents Couple Markers 3.2.7.3 Peak Search Marker Frequency | Time Peak Search Peak Search All Traces Next Peak Next Pk Right Next Pk Left Minimum Peak Pk-Pk Search Marker Delta Mkr->CF Mkr->Ref Lvl Continuous Peak Search 3.2.7.4 Pk Search Config Peak Threshold Auto Threshold Peak Excursion...
Page 9 Table Of Contents BW & Avg Type Center Presel On/Off Detector 1, 2, 3 Detector 1, 2, 3 Dwell Time 3.2.7.7 Marker To Marker Frequency | Time Mkr->CF Mkr->CF Step Mkr->Start Mkr->Stop Mkr->Ref Lvl MkrD->CF MkrD->Span Mkr -> Zoom Center Mkr ->...
Page 10 Table Of Contents Select Limit Test Trace Frequency Interpolation Freq Reference Amplitude Interpolation Amptd Reference Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only) Copy from Limit Copy Build from Trace Build Description Comment Test Limits X-Axis Unit Delete All Limits Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only) Merge Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only) Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only) Limit Line Fail? (Remote Query Only)
Page 11 Table Of Contents Noise Source SNS Attached (Remote Query Only) ACP Enhanced Dynamic Range On/Off 3.2.8.7 Global Global Center Freq Global EMC Std Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) Extend Low Band Restore Defaults 3.2.8.8 Source RF Output Source Amplitude Tracking Peak Source Mode Source Setup Table...
Page 12 Table Of Contents Zoom Center Restart 3.2.9.2 Sweep Config Sweep Type Sweep Type Rules Sweep Time Rules FFT Width Points Zoom Points IF Dithering Image Protection Abort (Remote Command Only) 3.2.10 Trace 3.2.10.1 Select Trace 3.2.10.2 Trace Control Trace Type Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold View/Blank Trace Settings Table...
Page 13 Table Of Contents 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.1 Views 3.3.1.1 Normal 3.3.1.2 Carrier Info 3.3.2 Windows 3.3.2.1 Graph 3.3.2.2 Metrics 3.3.2.3 Gate 3.3.2.4 Marker Table 3.3.3 Amplitude 3.3.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Scale Range Y Axis Unit Ref Level Offset Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.3.3.2 Attenuation...
Page 14 Table Of Contents SW Preselection BW High Freq Prefilter 3.3.4 BW 3.3.4.1 Settings Res BW Video BW RBW Filter Type 3.3.5 Display 3.3.5.1 Meas Display Bar Graph On/Off 3.3.5.2 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Frequency Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.3.5.3 View View...
Page 15 Table Of Contents Marker Settings Diagram All Markers Off 3.3.7.3 Peak Search Marker Frequency Peak Search Marker Delta 3.3.7.4 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.3.8 Meas Setup 3.3.8.1 Settings Avg/Hold Number Averaging On/Off Avg Mode Integ BW PSD Unit IF Gain...
Page 16 Table Of Contents 3.3.9 Sweep 3.3.9.1 Sweep/Control Sweep Time Minimum Acquisition Time Sweep/Measure Restart Pause/Resume Abort (Remote Command Only) Sweep Time Annotation (Remote Query Only) 3.3.9.2 Sweep Config Sweep Time Rules Points IF Dithering Image Protection 3.3.10 Trace 3.3.10.1 Select Trace 3.3.10.2 Trace Control Trace Type Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold...
Page 17 Table Of Contents 3.4.2 Windows 3.4.2.1 Graph 3.4.2.2 Metrics - OBW Results 3.4.2.3 Metrics - OBW Boundaries 3.4.2.4 Gate 3.4.3 Amplitude 3.4.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Scale Range Y Axis Unit Ref Level Offset Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.4.3.2 Attenuation Full Range Atten Mech Atten Elec Atten...
Page 18 Table Of Contents Video BW RBW Filter Type 3.4.5 Display 3.4.5.1 Meas Display x dB BW Boundaries On/Off Boundary Frequency 3.4.5.2 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Frequency Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.4.5.3 View View User View Restore Layout to Default...
Page 19 Table Of Contents Marker Delta 3.4.7.4 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.4.8 Meas Setup 3.4.8.1 Settings Avg/Hold Num Averaging On/Off Average Mode % of OBW Power Power Ref x dB Power Integration Method Spur Avoidance Meas Setup Summary Table Auto Couple Meas Preset...
Page 20 Table Of Contents Sweep Time Rules Points IF Dithering Image Protection 3.4.10 Trace 3.4.10.1 Select Trace 3.4.10.2 Trace Control Trace Type Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold View/Blank 3.4.10.3 Math Math Function Operand 1 / Operand 2 Offset Reference 3.4.10.4 Detector...
Page 21 Table Of Contents 3.5.7.3 Gate 3.5.7.4 Marker Table 3.5.8 Amplitude 3.5.8.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Scale Range Y Axis Unit Ref Level Offset Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.5.8.2 Attenuation Full Range Atten Mech Atten Elec Atten Adjust Atten for Min Clipping Adjust Atten Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping Mech Atten Step...
Page 22 Table Of Contents 3.5.10.1 Meas Display Bar Graph On/Off 3.5.10.2 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Frequency Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.5.10.3 View View User View Restore Layout to Default Save Layout as New View Re-Save User View Rename User View Delete User View...
Page 23 Table Of Contents Marker Delta 3.5.12.4 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.5.13 Meas Setup 3.5.13.1 Settings Avg | Hold Number Averaging On/Off Avg Mode Meas Method Carrier/Offset/Limits Config Carrier Number of Carriers Couple to #1 Carrier Pwr Present Carrier Spacing Measurement Noise Bandwidth...
Page 24 Table Of Contents Filter Alpha 1002 Offset Freq 1002 Res BW 1002 Video BW 1003 Filter Type 1004 Filter BW 1004 Power Ref Type 1005 Limit Test 1006 Offset Freq 1007 Abs Limit 1007 Rel Limit (Car) 1007 Rel Limit (PSD) 1008 Fail Mask 1009...
Page 25 Table Of Contents Negative Offset Limit(Remote Command only) 1035 Rel Limit (PSD) 1036 Fail Mask 1037 Offset Frequency Define 1038 Offset Freq 1040 Integ BW 1042 Offset Side 1042 Method 1043 Filter Alpha 1044 Offset Freq 1044 Res BW 1044 Video BW 1045 Filter Type...
Page 26 Table Of Contents 3.5.13.8 Method for Carrier (Backward Compatibility SCPI) 1095 3.5.14 Sweep 1096 3.5.14.1 Sweep/Control 1096 Sweep Time 1096 Minimum Acquisition Time 1098 Sweep/Measure 1099 Restart 1101 Pause/Resume 1104 Abort (Remote Command Only) 1104 Sweep Time Annotation (Remote Query Only) 1105 3.5.14.2 Sweep Config 1105...
Page 27 Table Of Contents 3.6.1.1 Normal 1134 3.6.2 Windows 1134 3.6.2.1 Graph 1134 3.6.2.2 Metrics 1135 3.6.3 Amplitude 1137 3.6.3.1 Y Scale 1137 Ref Level Offset 1137 Minimum Probability 1138 3.6.3.2 Attenuation 1139 Full Range Atten 1141 Mech Atten 1142 Elec Atten 1144 Adjust Atten for Min Clipping 1148...
Page 28 Table Of Contents 3.6.5.1 View 1184 View 1184 User View 1184 Restore Layout to Default 1185 Save Layout as New View 1185 Re-Save User View 1186 Rename User View 1186 Delete User View 1186 Delete All User Views 1187 View Editor Remote Commands 1187 View Listing Query 1187...
Page 29 Table Of Contents Meas Setup Summary Table 1207 Auto Couple 1207 Meas Preset 1209 3.6.8.2 Meas Standard 1209 Radio Standard Presets 1209 Enable Non-Std Meas 1223 3.6.8.3 Advanced 1223 IF Gain 1224 IF Upsampling Ratio 1224 3.6.8.4 Global 1225 Global Center Freq 1225 Global EMC Std 1226...
Page 30 Table Of Contents Ref Position 1249 Auto Scaling 1249 3.7.3.2 Attenuation 1250 Full Range Atten 1252 Mech Atten 1253 Elec Atten 1256 Adjust Atten for Min Clipping 1260 Adjust Atten 1260 Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping 1260 Mech Atten Step 1264 3.7.3.3 Range (Baseband Input models) 1265 Range Auto/Man...
Page 31 Table Of Contents Re-Save User View 1296 Rename User View 1296 Delete User View 1296 Delete All User Views 1297 View Editor Remote Commands 1297 View Listing Query 1297 User View Listing Query 1297 3.7.5.3 Annotation 1298 Graticule 1298 Screen Annotation 1298 Trace Annotation 1299...
Page 32 Table Of Contents Threshold Level 1319 IF Gain 1320 Meas Setup Summary Table 1321 Auto Couple 1321 Meas Preset 1323 3.7.8.2 Meas Method 1323 Meas Method 1323 Burst Width Auto Detection 1324 Burst Width 1324 3.7.8.3 Meas Standard 1325 Radio Standard Presets 1325 Enable Non-Std Meas 1339...
Page 33 Table Of Contents 3.8.2.3 All Range Table 1357 3.8.2.4 Gate 1358 3.8.2.5 Marker Table 1358 3.8.3 Amplitude 1358 3.8.3.1 Y Scale 1358 Ref Value 1359 Scale/Div 1359 Scale Range 1360 Y Axis Unit 1360 Ref Level Offset 1365 Ref Position 1366 Auto Scaling 1366...
Page 34 Table Of Contents Graticule 1406 Screen Annotation 1407 Trace Annotation 1407 Control Annotation 1408 Frequency Annotation 1408 Meas Bar 1409 Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 1409 3.8.5.3 View 1410 Views 1410 Graph + Metrics 1411 All Ranges 1411 User View 1411 Restore Layout to Default 1412...
Page 35 Table Of Contents Marker Frequency 1430 Relative To 1430 Marker Trace 1430 Marker Settings Diagram 1431 3.8.8 Meas Setup 1431 3.8.8.1 Settings 1431 Avg/Hold Num 1431 Averaging On/Off 1432 Average Mode 1432 Average Type 1433 Meas Type 1433 Spur 1435 Range 1435 Spur Report Mode...
Page 36 Table Of Contents IF Gain 1460 Detector/Sweep 1460 Frequency Range 1460 Enabled 1461 Start Freq 1461 Stop Freq 1461 Center Frequency 1461 Span 1461 Sweep Time 1461 Points 1462 Detector 1 1463 Detector 2 1464 Limits 1465 Frequency Range 1465 Enabled 1465 Start Freq...
Page 37 Table Of Contents Sweep Time Rules 1500 IF Dithering 1500 Image Protection 1501 3.8.10 Trace 1501 3.8.10.1 Select Trace 1507 3.8.10.2 Trace Control 1507 Trace Type 1508 Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold 1513 View/Blank 1513 3.8.10.3 Math 1516 Math Function...
Page 38 Table Of Contents 3.9.12 Windows 1538 3.9.12.1 Graph 1539 Graph Window in Abs Pwr Freq View 1539 Graph Window in Rel Pwr Freq View 1540 Graph Window in Integrated Power View 1541 Graph Window in Carrier Info View 1542 3.9.12.2 Table 1544 Table Window in Abs Pwr Freq View 1544...
Page 39 Table Of Contents SW Preselection BW 1601 High Freq Prefilter 1601 3.9.14 BW 1603 3.9.14.1 Settings 1603 RBW Filter Type 1603 3.9.15 Display 1604 3.9.15.1 Meas Display 1604 Limit Lines 1604 3.9.15.2 Annotation 1604 Graticule 1604 Screen Annotation 1605 Trace Annotation 1605 Control Annotation 1606...
Page 40 Table Of Contents Offset (Bandwidth) 1625 Offset Freq Define 1625 Offset Detector 1629 Offset Average Type (Remote Command Only) 1630 Start Freq 1631 Stop Freq 1635 Res BW 1637 Meas BW 1639 Video BW 1640 VBW/RBW 1641 Offset (Sweep) 1642 Offset Freq Define 1642 Offset Detector...
Page 41 Table Of Contents Sweep Time Annotation (Remote Query Only) 1676 Sweep Type 1676 Offset Side 1677 Start Freq 1678 Stop Freq 1678 Abs Start 1678 Abs Stop 1679 Rel Start 1681 Rel Stop 1681 Fail Mask 1682 Show Abs2 Limit 1683 Abs2 Start 1683...
Page 42 Table Of Contents Extend Low Band 1724 Restore Defaults 1725 3.9.19 Sweep 1725 3.9.19.1 Sweep/Control 1725 Sweep/Measure 1725 Restart 1727 Pause/Resume 1730 Abort (Remote Command Only) 1730 3.9.19.2 X Scale 1731 Ref Value 1731 Scale/Div 1731 Ref Position 1732 Auto Scaling 1732 3.9.19.3 Sweep Config 1733...
Page 43 Table Of Contents 3.10.2 Windows 1759 3.10.2.1 Graph 1759 3.10.2.2 Metrics 1760 3.10.3 Amplitude 1760 3.10.3.1 Y Scale 1760 Ref Value 1760 Scale/Div 1761 Y Axis Unit 1761 Ref Level Offset 1766 Ref Position 1767 3.10.3.2 Attenuation 1767 Full Range Atten 1769 Mech Atten 1770...
Page 44 Table Of Contents Screen Annotation 1810 Trace Annotation 1811 Control Annotation 1811 Frequency Annotation 1811 Meas Bar 1812 Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 1812 3.10.5.2 View 1813 View 1814 User View 1814 Restore Layout to Default 1814 Save Layout as New View 1815 Re-Save User View 1815...
Page 45 Table Of Contents Restore Defaults 1836 3.10.9 Sweep 1836 3.10.9.1 Sweep/Control 1836 Sweep Time 1836 Sweep/Measure 1838 Restart 1839 Pause/Resume 1842 Abort (Remote Command Only) 1842 3.10.9.2 Sweep Config 1843 Points 1843 IF Dithering 1844 Image Protection 1845 3.10.10 Trace 1845 3.10.10.1 Trace Control 1845...
Page 46 Table Of Contents 3.11.3.4 Signal Path 1878 Presel Center 1878 Preselector Adjust 1880 Internal Preamp 1881 1882 µW Path Control 1884 Software Preselection 1893 SW Preselection Type 1894 SW Preselection BW 1895 High Freq Prefilter 1896 3.11.4 BW 1897 3.11.4.1 Settings 1897 Res BW 1898...
Page 47 Table Of Contents Averaging On/Off 1910 Average Mode 1910 Meas Setup Summary Table 1911 Harmonics 1911 Range Table (On/Off) 1911 Range Table 1912 Measure Tone 1912 Frequency 1912 Res BW 1913 Dwell Time 1914 Auto-Fill 1914 Meas Setup Summary Table 1915 Auto Couple 1915...
Page 48 Table Of Contents 3.12.3.2 Mechanical Attenuator List 1937 3.12.3.3 Electronic Attenuation List 1937 3.12.3.4 RBW Type List 1938 3.12.3.5 RBW List 1938 3.12.3.6 VBW List 1939 3.12.3.7 Sweep Time List 1939 3.12.3.8 Trigger Delay List 1940 3.12.3.9 Phase Noise Optimization 1940 3.12.3.10 Detector List 1941...
Page 49 Table Of Contents Max Mixer Lvl Rules 1969 3.13.3.3 Range (Baseband Input models) 1970 Range Auto/Man 1971 I Range 1972 Q Range 1973 Q Same as I 1974 3.13.3.4 Range (Non-attenuator models) 1975 Range 1975 Adjust Range for Min Clipping 1975 Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping 1976...
Page 50 Table Of Contents Meas Bar 2004 Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 2004 3.13.6 Frequency 2006 3.13.6.1 Settings 2006 Center Frequency 2006 CF Step 2011 Freq Offset 2012 3.13.7 Marker 2013 3.13.8 Meas Setup 2013 3.13.8.1 Settings 2013 Segments 2013 Total Meas Time 2014 Meas Interval 2014...
Page 51 Table Of Contents 4.1.1 Show System 2045 4.1.1.1 Show System contents (Remote Query Only) 2046 4.1.1.2 Computer System description (Remote Query Only) 2046 4.1.2 Show Hardware 2046 4.1.3 Show LXI 2046 4.1.4 Show Support Subscriptions 2047 4.1.5 Show Support ID 2047 4.1.6 Control Panel…...
Page 52 Table Of Contents 4.2.5.1 LAN Reset 2062 4.2.5.2 Device Identification (Remote Command Only) 2062 4.2.6 Restore I/O Config Defaults 2063 4.2.7 Query USB Connection (Remote Query Only) 2063 4.2.8 USB Connection Status (Remote Query Only) 2064 4.2.9 USB Packet Count (Remote Query Only) 2064 4.2.10 Lock Remote I/O Session (Remote Command only) 2065...
Page 53 Table Of Contents 4.3.7.8 Numeric Entry Auto Open 2077 4.3.7.9 Touch On/Off 2078 4.3.7.10 Control Size 2078 4.3.7.11 Quick Save Mode 2078 4.3.7.12 Screen Tabs Left/Right 2079 4.3.7.13 Hide Screen Tabs in Full Screen 2080 4.3.7.14 2-Screen Orientation 2081 4.3.7.15 Clock Format 2082 4.3.7.16 Language 2083...
Page 54 Table Of Contents 4.5.7 All 2101 4.6 Alignments 2103 4.6.1 Auto Align 2103 4.6.1.1 Auto Align 2103 4.6.1.2 All but RF 2106 4.6.1.3 Alert 2106 4.6.2 Align Now 2108 4.6.2.1 Align Now All 2110 4.6.2.2 Align Now All but RF 2112 4.6.2.3 Align Now RF 2114...
Page 55 Table Of Contents 4.6.3.1 Source Path Delay Calibration 2129 4.6.3.2 Path Delay Correction On/Off(Remote Command only) 2131 4.6.4 Show Alignment Statistics 2131 4.6.5 Timebase DAC 2143 4.6.5.1 Timebase DAC 2143 4.6.5.2 User Value 2144 4.6.6 Advanced 2145 4.6.6.1 Characterize Preselector 2145 4.6.6.2 Characterize Reference Clock 2147...
Page 56 Table Of Contents 4.7.4.1 Application Licenses 2180 4.7.4.2 Instrument Software Options 2180 4.7.4.3 License Checked Out Query (Remote Query Only) 2180 4.7.4.4 List Licenses Checked Out (Remote Query Only) 2181 4.7.4.5 Borrowed Network Licenses 2181 4.7.4.6 Borrow a License 2182 4.7.4.7 Listing Borrowed Licenses and Return a Borrowed License 2183 List Borrowed Licenses (Remote Query Only)
Page 57 Table Of Contents 4.11.5 Copy 2195 4.11.6 Insert *OPC? Below 2195 4.11.7 Move Up 2195 4.11.8 Move Down 2195 4.11.9 Delete Row 2195 4.11.10 Delete All 2195 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 2196 4.12.1 List installed Options (Remote Query Only) 2196 4.12.2 Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only) 2197...
Page 58 Table Of Contents 5.14 Restart Instrument (Shutdown) 2221 5.15 Restart Application (Application Shutdown) 2222 5.16 System Log Off (Remote Command Only) 2223 5.17 Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown) 2224 6 Input/Output 2225 6.1 RF Source 2226 6.1.1 RF Output 2226 6.1.2 RF Output Port 2226 6.1.3 Half Duplex Output Port 2228...
Page 59 Table Of Contents Freq/Chan 2247 Power 2248 Waveform 2248 Waveform File 2249 Step Duration 2249 Duration Time 2250 Play Count 2251 Trig Out 2252 Step Configuration (Remote Command Only) 2252 Step Configuration of Step Trigger parameter list (Remote Command Only) 2254 Step Configuration of Transition Time parameter list (Remote Command Only) 2255...
Page 60 Table Of Contents 6.1.11.3 AM Rate 2279 6.1.11.4 AM Rate Increment 2280 6.1.11.5 FM 2280 6.1.11.6 FM Deviation 2281 6.1.11.7 FM Rate 2281 6.1.11.8 FM Rate Increment 2281 6.1.11.9 PM 2282 6.1.11.10 PM Deviation 2282 6.1.11.11 PM Rate 2282 6.1.11.12 PM Rate Increment 2283 6.1.11.13 ARB Setup 2283...
Page 61 Table Of Contents Segments in ARB Memory 2306 Recall Waveform 2306 Delete Segment From ARB Mem 2306 Delete All From ARB Memory 2306 Query ARB Memory File List (Remote Query Only) 2306 Query ARB Memory Full File List (Remote Query Only) 2307 Waveform Sequences 2307...
Page 62 Table Of Contents 6.1.12 Trigger Initiate 2323 6.1.13 Source Sync 2323 6.1.13.1 Sync Config 2323 6.1.13.2 Sync Type 2324 6.1.13.3 Sync Settings 2325 Secondary Module List 2325 Sync Settings 2326 Sync Segment 2 2327 Segment 2 Frequency 2327 IP Address 2328 SCPI Socket Port 2328...
Page 63 Table Of Contents 6.2.13.5 Delete All VDI CCD Corrections 2370 6.2.13.6 Harmonic 2370 6.2.13.7 LO Doubler 2371 6.2.13.8 Refresh USB Mixer Connection 2371 6.2.14 Mixer Path 2372 6.2.15 User IF Freq 2373 6.2.16 Signal ID On/Off 2373 6.2.17 Signal ID Mode 2374 6.2.18 Cable IF Loss 2375...
Page 64 Table Of Contents Q Port 2393 Q Port Probe Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) 2393 Q-bar Port 2393 Q-bar Probe Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) 2394 6.2.22 I/Q Cable Calibrate 2394 6.2.22.1 I Port 2395 6.2.22.2 I-bar Port 2395 6.2.22.3 Q Port 2396 6.2.22.4 Q-bar Port 2396...
Page 65 Table Of Contents 6.5.5.3 Amplitude 2425 6.5.5.4 Go to Row 2425 6.5.5.5 Insert Row Below 2425 6.5.5.6 Delete Row 2425 6.5.5.7 Scale X Axis 2425 6.5.5.8 Delete Correction 2426 6.5.5.9 Correction Graph 2426 6.5.6 Edit Correction Settings 2427 6.5.6.1 Select Correction 2427 6.5.6.2 Freq Interpolation 2427...
Page 66 Table Of Contents 6.5.13.3 Delete Row 2443 6.5.13.4 Select File 2443 6.5.13.5 Specify File 2443 6.5.13.6 Remove File 2443 6.5.13.7 Correction Trace Display 2443 6.5.13.8 Description 2444 6.5.13.9 Comment 2444 6.5.13.10 Start Frequency 2444 6.5.13.11 Stop Frequency 2445 6.5.14 Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only) 2445 6.5.15 Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only) 2446...
Page 67 Table Of Contents 6.7.9 Ext/Wide IF Out 2470 6.7.10 IF2 Out 2471 6.7.11 REF Out 2472 6.7.12 LO Ref Out 2472 6.8 Trigger Output 2474 6.8.1 Trig 1 – 4 Out 2474 6.8.2 Trig 1 – 4 Out Polarity 2476 6.8.3 Trig 1 –...
Page 68 Table Of Contents 6.9.1.15 Insert Row Below 2492 6.9.1.16 Description 2492 6.9.1.17 Use Current Meas 2492 6.9.1.18 Duplicate Row 2493 6.9.1.19 Delete Row 2493 6.9.1.20 Delete All 2493 6.9.1.21 Calibrate 2493 6.9.1.22 Apply 2494 6.9.1.23 Name 2494 6.9.1.24 Last Cal 2495 6.9.1.25 Cal Applied 2495...
Page 69 Table Of Contents 6.9.1.48 Preamp 2509 6.9.1.49 Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) 2509 6.9.1.50 µW Path Control 2510 6.9.1.51 Coupling 2510 6.9.1.52 Phase Noise Optimization 2511 6.9.1.53 Phase Noise Optimization All Option 2516 6.9.1.54 Mixing Mode 2517 6.9.1.55 Match State 2517 6.9.2 Cal Group 2518 6.9.3 Apply Cal Group...
Page 70: Measurement Data
Table Of Contents 7.2.3.1 Recall To Trace 2536 7.2.3.2 Register 1 thru Register 16 2536 7.2.3.3 Edit Register Names 2537 7.2.4 Screen Config + State 2537 7.2.5 Measurement Data 2538 7.2.5.1 Data Type 2538 Trace 2538 Spectrogram 2539 7.2.6 Limit 2539 7.2.6.1 Select Limit 2540...
Page 71 Table Of Contents 7.3.2.2 Edit Register Names 2556 7.3.3 Trace+State 2557 7.3.3.1 Save From Trace 2559 7.3.3.2 Register 1 thru Register 16 2560 7.3.3.3 Edit Register Names 2560 7.3.4 Screen Config + State 2561 7.3.5 Measurement Data 2561 7.3.5.1 Save From 2562 7.3.5.2 Data Type 2562...
Page 72 Table Of Contents 7.3.14.3 Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) 2624 7.3.14.4 Mass Storage Device Copy (Remote Command Only) 2624 7.3.14.5 Mass Storage Delete (Remote Command Only) 2625 7.3.14.6 Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only) 2625 7.3.14.7 Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only) 2625 7.3.14.8 Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only) 2625...
Page 73 Table Of Contents 8.1.1.13 Input I 2656 8.1.1.14 Input Q 2656 8.1.1.15 I (Demodulated) 2657 8.1.1.16 Q (Demodulated) 2657 8.1.1.17 Aux I/Q Mag 2658 8.1.1.18 PXI 2658 8.1.1.19 Internal 2659 8.1.1.20 Prot Channel Detection 2659 8.1.1.21 Prot Frame Aligned 2660 8.1.1.22 Prot Event 2660 8.1.2 Trigger Level...
Page 74 Table Of Contents 8.2.1 Select Gate Source 2682 8.2.2 Sync Holdoff 2683 8.3 Gate Settings 2685 8.3.1 Gate On/Off 2685 8.3.2 Gate View On/Off 2686 8.3.3 Gate Delay 2688 8.3.4 Gate Length 2689 8.3.5 Gate Method 2690 8.3.6 Control Edge/Level 2691 8.3.7 Gate Holdoff 2692...
Page 75 Table Of Contents 2717 2718 2718 2720 2720 2721 2742 2743 9.2 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands 2744 9.2.1 *CAL? - Calibration Query 2744 9.2.2 *CLS - Clear Status 2745 9.2.3 *ESE - Standard Event Status Enable 2745 9.2.4 *ESR? - Standard Event Status Register Query 2746 9.2.5 *IDN? - Identification Query 2746...
Page 76 Table Of Contents 9.3.3.1 Clear Trace (Remote Command Only) 2757 9.3.3.2 Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) 2758 9.3.3.3 Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) 2760 9.3.3.4 Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only) 2761 9.3.3.5 Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only) 2761 9.3.3.6 Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)
Page 77 Table Of Contents 9.4.6.5 Questionable Register 2794 Questionable Condition 2795 Questionable Enable 2795 Questionable Event Query 2796 Questionable Negative Transition 2796 Questionable Positive Transition 2796 9.4.6.6 Questionable Power Register 2797 Questionable Power Condition 2798 Questionable Power Enable 2798 Questionable Power Event Query 2799 Questionable Power Negative Transition 2799...
Page 78 Table Of Contents Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query 2818 Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition 2818 Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition 2819 9.4.6.13 Questionable Integrity Register 2819 Questionable Integrity Condition 2821 Questionable Integrity Enable 2821 Questionable Integrity Event Query 2822 Questionable Integrity Negative Transition 2822 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition 2822...
Page 79 Table Of Contents 10.2.10 Frequency Reference Source 2838 10.2.11 IF Gain 2838 10.2.12 IF Type 2838 10.2.13 Include Power Spectrum 2838 10.2.14 Mechanical Attenuation 2839 10.2.15 Preamp Mode 2839 10.2.16 Resolution Bandwidth Mode 2839 10.2.17 Resolution Bandwidth 2840 10.2.18 Trigger Delay 2840 10.2.19 Trigger Level 2840...
Page 80 X-Series Signal Analyzers Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 1 Documentation Roadmap This section describes the Keysight products covered by this document, and provides links to related documentation. – "Products Covered by this Document" on page 81 – "Additional Documentation" on page 82...
Page 81 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.1 Products Covered by this Document For the full list of instrument models covered by this documentation, see the title page: "Spectrum Analyzer ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference" on page Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 82 – Users & Programmers Reference, in downloadable PDF format For information on this Mode, download from: http://literature.cdn.keysight.com/litweb/pdf/N9060-90041.pdf The following documents are available online at keysight.com: X-Series Messages Guide The following documents are in downloadable PDF format: Getting Started Guides, Programming & Security –...
Page 83 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.2 Additional Documentation – N9020B MXA Specifications Guide – N9030B PXA Specifications Guide – N9040B UXA Specifications Guide – N9041B UXA Specifications Guide – N9030B Data Sheet Measurement Guides – Analog Demod Measurement Application Measurement Guide – EMI Measurement Application Measurement Guide –...
Page 84 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.2 Additional Documentation – Time Gated Spectral Analysis with X-Series Signal Analyzers – Using Noise Floor Extension in an X-Series Signal Analyzer Installation Notes – N9042B Power Supply Upgrade Option HW1 – N9042B X-Series Signal Analyzer 4-GHz Analysis Bandwidth Option B14 B16 and B17 –...
Page 85 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.2 Additional Documentation – N9080B and N9082B LTE and LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD X-Series Measurement Application – N9081C Bluetooth X-Series Measurement Application – N9084EM0E Short Range Communication and IoT X-Series Measurement Application – N9092EM0E Avionics X-Series Measurement Application Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 86 X-Series Signal Analyzers Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 2 User Interface Here are the basic elements of the Multitouch User Interface. For more information, tap a topic. Included in this section are also topics for several front panel keys not described in other topics.
Page 87 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1 Screen Tabs In the X-Series Multitouch User Interface (or Multitouch UI), you can run many different Measurement Applications, or “Modes”. Examples are Spectrum Analyzer Mode, LTE-A FDD Mode, IQ Analyzer Mode, and Real Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Page 88 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The following topics provide more information: – "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 88 – "Add Screen" on page 105 – "Multiscreen" on page 176 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog The Mode/Meas/View dialog opens when you press the selected (blue) Screen tab (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 89 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.1 Mode The first column in the Mode/Meas/View dialog allows you to select the desired Mode from those currently licensed in your instrument. Modes, also known as “measurement applications”, are collections of measurement capabilities packaged together to provide you with an instrument personality specific to your measurement needs.
Page 90 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INSTrument:SELect CONFigure commands separately. See "Mode and Measurement Select" on page :INSTrument[:SELect] <mode_id> Remote Command where <mode_id> is one of the values listed in "Index to Modes" on page 91 below :INSTrument[:SELect]? :INST SA Example :INST:CAT? Notes...
Page 91 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :CONF commands Index to Modes The Mode Number in the table below is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument:NSELect command. The Mode Parameter is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument[:SELect] command. Your actual choices will depend upon which applications are installed in your instrument.
Page 92 Each application (Mode) that runs in an X-Series instrument consumes virtual memory. The various applications consume varying amounts of virtual memory, and as more applications run, the memory consumption increases. Keysight characterizes each Mode and assigns a memory usage quantity based on a conservative estimate.
Page 93 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INST:CAT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string of the installed and licensed modes separated with a comma. Example: "SA,PNOISE,WCDMA" :INSTrument:CATalog? INSTrument:SELECT Backwards VSA (E4406A): returned a list of installed items Compatibility as a comma separated list of string values, for example: Notes "BASIC","GSM","EDGEGSM","CDMA","SERVICE"...
Page 94 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Current Application Options (Remote Command Only) Returns a string that is the Options list of the currently selected application (Mode). This information is also displayed in the Show System screen :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion? Remote Command :SYST:APPL:OPT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string that is the Option list of the currently selected application (Mode).
Page 95 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Application Catalog Revision (Remote Command Only) Returns the Revision of the provided Model Number. :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision? <model> Remote Command :SYST:APPL:CAT:REV? ‘N9060A’ Example Notes Returned value is a quoted string of revision for the provided Model Number. The revision will be a null- string ("") if the provided Model Number is not installed, licensed, and loaded.
Page 96 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs GSM Mode compatibility command (Remote Command only) Provided for backwards compatibility. When this command is received, the analyzer aliases it to the following: :INST:SEL EDGEGSM :INSTrument[:SELect] GSM Remote Command :INST GSM Example SA compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 97 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs This results in the analyzer being placed in the EMI Receiver Mode, running the APD measurement, in order to emulate the ESU APD Mode. :INSTrument[:SELect] APDistribution Remote Command :INST APD Example IF Mode compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 98 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 99 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.5 Sequencer Allows multiple Screens to update sequentially while in "Multiscreen" on page 176 display mode. Each Screen updates in sequence, and when all have updated, the sequence will start again. To start the Sequencer, you must have more than one Screen defined, and you must have Multiscreen selected (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 100 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs In the Sequencer block in the upper left hand corner, tap the Sequencing switch to turn it On: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 101 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The instrument will immediately exit the Mode/Meas/View Dialog and begin making measurements in each of the screens, one after the other. When a measurement is being made in a particular Screen, that Screen’s tab will be blue. Measurement being made in Screen 1: Measurement being made in Screen 2: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 102 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Touching any key or control on the display will cause the Sequencer to stop, so that you can make desired changes. When this happens, the message “Sequencer stopped” is displayed. When the Sequencer is running, the screens update in the order in which they were created.
Page 103 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs To reset the name, delete the screen name entirely. Each Screen Name must be unique; you cannot give the same name to more than one screen. :INSTrument:SCReen:REName <alphanumeric> Remote Command :INST:SCR:REN “Baseband” Example Notes The currently active screen is renamed.
Page 104 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs “This function will delete all defined screens and their settings, except for the current screen. This action cannot be undone. Do you want to proceed?” Pressing OK or Enter deletes the screen, pressing Cancel or ESC does not. :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Remote Command...
Page 105 2.1 Screen Tabs functions – Easy-to-use Microsoft Windows graphical user interface For more information see the Keysight 89600 Series VSA web site at www.keysight.com/find/89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA in the instrument, start the 89600 VSA software, then open the 89600 VSA Help and navigate to the topic "About...
Page 106 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; Screen SCPI cannot be used when Display is disabled” appears Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 107 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar 2.2 Meas Bar The Meas Bar is used to display annotation for the current measurement. There are three primary uses for the Meas Bar: 1. To show annotation for the most important parameters in the measurement so you can see them at a glance 2.
Page 108 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar Settings that are colored amber are those that you need to be particularly aware of; for example, if Alignments are off, this is shown in amber, so you will know that you may not be meeting spec. Similarly, if DC coupling is on, this is shown amber, to alert you to be careful what voltage you put on the input.
Page 109 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar LXI indicator This indicator displays in green when LAN is connected, in white when LAN is not connected, and in red when LAN is connected but has a connection problem. PASS/FAIL indicator This annunciator displays when Limits are turned on. It is green if all Limits are passing, and a red FAIL if any limit is not passing.
Page 110 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar In the example above, trace 1 is active, visible, and in Average using the Sample detector, the other traces are inactive, blanked and in Clear/Write using the Normal detector. Tapping this panel drops down controls for the Traces. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 111 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display 2.3 Measurement Display The Measurement Display contains one or more data windows displaying the result of the current measurement. These may be graphical or textual windows. Each window in the Measurement display contains a "Window Title"...
Page 112 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Measurements that support User Views (see "View Editor" on page 155) also display the Window Number in the Window Title, to enable window addressing from SCPI. The number is the number that will be used in the SCPI command to address that window, for example, in the WCDMA Mod Accuracy measurement, Code Domain Power is assigned window number 6, so you address it with the following SCPI command:...
Page 113 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown can be a cascaded list, if the number of available results requires categorization to hold them all: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 114 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown sometimes includes controls for further configuring the window, for example, in LTE choosing the desired Component Carrier and Data format. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 115 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching a window’s title dropdown also selects the window. 2.3.2 Measurement Data The Measurement Data region shows graphical or textual data for the Data selected in the Window Title Data control. Below you can see examples of both graphical and textual windows in a four-window display.
Page 116 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Swipe There are several swipe actions, as listed below. One of the most important actions is swiping a spectrum window to the left or right, or up or down, to adjust the frequency and level of the spectrum, as shown below. Swipe actions are summarized in the table below.
Page 117 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Object Action Toggle control Toggle in that direction Pinch You can also pinch in or out either horizontally or vertically to zoom in the x-axis or y-axis dimension. For example, a pinch horizontally lets you adjust the Span of the Spectrum window.
Page 118: Annotation Hotspot
2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Right Click on Lets you select Help the Background Right Click on a Lets you add or remove that control from the User Menu or get Help on that Menu Panel control control Tapping an object causes the actions defined in the table below: Object Action Marker...
Page 119 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching anywhere off the hotspot panel or pressing any hardkey except Save or Quick Save closes the hotspot panel. Annotation which is not currently able to be adjusted is not grayed out on the display, but the control in the hotspot that drops down or pops up is grayed out.
Page 120: Menu Panel
2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel is the main focus of the X-Series Multitouch user interface. The controls include active functions, dropdowns, action buttons, radio buttons and toggles. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 121 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 122 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel normally appears on the right side of the display and consists of a rectangular panel with multiple “sub-panels” lying on top of each other, each sub- panel being accessed by a tab on the right. You press a front panel key (or “hardkey”) to access a particular menu.
Page 123 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 124 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel If you move to a different menu panel or sub-panel and then come back to a previous panel, the previous panel is always reset to be scrolled all the way back to the top. Accessing Menus Without Using Front-Panel Keys You can access the menu panels without using the front panel keys, as you would need to do if you were operating the instrument using Remote Desktop.
Page 125 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel for example 13.255 GHz, as in the example below: An active function is “active” if the numeric value is surrounded by a black background with a blue border, as below. In this state, it is ready to receive numeric input from the number pad on the front panel, the knob, or the step keys.
Page 126 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel This causes the Numeric Entry Panel to pop up to receive the numbers you are typing: Type in as many digits as required, then touch one of the unit terminator buttons in the Numeric Entry Panel to complete the entry. In this case, 2 GHz was the desired entry, so you just touch the “GHz”...
Page 127 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The Numeric Entry Panel disappears and, in the example, the active function value becomes 2 GHz. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 128 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel It is important to note that you can always pop up the Numeric Entry Panel by touching an active function control while it is active; for example, if you were to touch it in the figure above, the Numeric Entry Panel would pop up right next to the control: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 129 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 130: Right-Click Menu
2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel You can display the Numeric Entry Panel by touching any active function control while it is active, but you don’t have to pop up the Numeric Entry Panel first, you can just start typing and it will pop up on its own, thus saving you a keystroke. You can also adjust a value without displaying the Numeric Entry panel by turning the knob or using the step keys while an active function is active.
Page 131: Add To Scpi Recorder
2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1.4 Add to SCPI Recorder Adds SCPI to the recorder from User Interface features that have equivalent SCPI. This is the manual mode for adding SCPI to the recorder when you do not wish to add SCPI continuously.
Page 132: Cancel Key
2 User Interface 2.5 Cancel key 2.5 Cancel key This front-panel key has the same functions as the Windows Esc (Escape) key. It does the following: – Cancels dialogs – Cancels active functions (unless there is an entry in progress, in which case it cancels that, and reverts to the previous value) –...
Page 133: Onscreen Keyboard Key
2 User Interface 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key This key turns the onscreen alpha keyboard (OSK) on and off. There are two onscreen keyboards: – The Multitouch OSK, which pops up automatically if, while using the analyzer application, a text field becomes the active function –...
Page 134: Touch On/Off Key
2 User Interface 2.7 Touch On/Off Key 2.7 Touch On/Off Key This front-panel key turns the display touch functionality on and off. If off, you can turn it back on using the front panel Touch On/Off key. When the touch functionality is off, you can still use a mouse as a pointer.
Page 135: Tab Key
2 User Interface 2.8 Tab key 2.8 Tab key This key has the same function as the Tab key on a PC keyboard. You can use this key to display the Windows Taskbar, as follows. – Alt-Tab to the Desktop –...
Page 136: Local Button
2 User Interface 2.9 Local Button 2.9 Local Button Appears in the Menu Panel when the instrument is in remote, and can be brought back to local via the Local (ESC) Key. See also "Cancel key" on page 132. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 137: Control Bar
2 User Interface 2.10 Control Bar 2.10 Control Bar The Control Bar contains controls and readouts that let you control instrument functions independent of the current measurement. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 138: Windows
2 User Interface 2.11 Windows 2.11 Windows Pressing the Windows icon on the "Control Bar" on page 137 has the same effect as pressing the Windows icon on the Windows taskbar. It displays the Windows taskbar and Start Menu, which allows you to launch Windows programs and access features such as the Control Panel.
Page 139: Undo/Redo
2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo 2.12 Undo/Redo The Undo button in the "Control Bar" on page 137, and the Undo front panel key, are used to undo the most recently executed function. If you Undo a function, and then decide you should not have done so, you can use the Redo button in the "Control Bar"...
Page 140 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo UNDO stack REDO stack Det = Peak RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz When you press Undo, the top item on the Undo stack is removed, the action represented by that item is undone, and the item is placed on the Redo stack. So pressing Undo once in the above case would undo the setting of the peak detector, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack...
Page 141 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo For example, in the example above, if you now were to change another setting, such as VBW = 1 kHz, the Redo stack gets cleared, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack REDO stack VBW = 1 kHz RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz...
Page 142 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo When you press the Redo icon or Ctl and the Undo hardkey, you are notified with an advisory popup message; for example, if the Center Frequency had been 300 MHz, and you changed it to 1 GHz and then pressed Undo, the message would say: UNDO: Center Freq 1 GHz ->...
Page 143: File Functions
2 User Interface 2.13 File Functions 2.13 File Functions The File Functions popup contains controls for executing Save, Recall, File and Print operations. You display the File Functions popup by tapping the File Functions icon in the "Control Bar" on page 137.
Page 144: Help
2 User Interface 2.14 Help 2.14 Help Pressing the Help button in the "Control Bar" on page 137, the Help front panel key, or the F1 key if you have a PC keyboard connected, opens the context-sensitive help system. The Help button appears in the "Control Bar"...
Page 145: Status Bar
2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar 2.15 Status Bar The Status Panel (or Status Bar) appears at the bottom of the display and contains three fields: The Message Balloon appears on the left side of the Status Panel and lets you know when there is an unread message in the queue.
Page 146 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The triangle is unfilled if no there are no open conditions, filled with yellow if all open conditions are warnings, and filled with red if at least one open condition is an error. The number displayed is the total number of open conditions. Touching the Condition Indicator opens up the Show Status dialog (see below) with the Current Conditions tab selected.
Page 147 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar If the display fills up, scrolling is enabled just as in other X-Series Multi-touch UI displays. The Status dialog automatically refreshes as new messages and conditions occur. At the bottom of the screen is a Clear Message Queue button. This button clears all errors in all error queues.
Page 148 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar <Error Number>,<Error> Where <Error Number> <Error> are those shown on the Show Errors screen Backwards In some legacy analyzers, the Repeat field shows the number of times the message has repeated since Compatibility the last time the error queue was cleared. In the X-Series, the Repeat field shows the number of times Notes the error has repeated since the last intervening error.
Page 149 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the History display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Repeat (RPT) This field shows the number of consecutive instances of the event, uninterrupted by other events.
Page 150 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar peak found” – A condition is an occurrence of finite duration, that is, it has a start and an end. Conditions are states of the analyzer characterized by some combination of settings or some kind of failure that the user needs to be told about while it is happening, but then can stop being told once it goes away;...
Page 151 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the Current Conditions display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning or informational Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Time Shows the most recent time (including the date) at which the event occurred.
Page 152 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 153: Block Diagram
2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram 2.16 Block Diagram When you press the Block Diagram button in the "Control Bar" on page 137, the display changes to a stylized pictorial representation of the current internal hardware setup and signal processing path. When you touch one of the blocks on the Block Diagram, the corresponding menu panel opens.
Page 154 2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram And here is the Block Diagram when the I/Q inputs are selected: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 155: View Editor
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17 View Editor This section describes the use of the View Editor, which allows you to: – Add windows to and delete windows from the current measurement – Resize and rearrange windows – Create User Views User Views are custom Views that you create by adding, deleting, rearranging, resizing, or changing the contents of the windows in an existing View, and then saving the edited View as a new View.
Page 156 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 157 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 158 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor You can save an edited View using the Save Layout as New View control in the View menu (see "To Save a User View" on page 168). On occasion, the instrument may automatically save an edited View for you. If you have edited a View, so that the * is displaying next to the View name, you must save that View as a User View before you save State or switch measurements.
Page 159: To Create A User View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor To Close the View Editor Tap the View Editor button again. The user chooses the desired View through the use of the Mode/Meas/View dialog (see "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 88) or the View menu (a tab under the Display key).
Page 160 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you do this, you get the View Editor screen, which appears as below. The menu panel switches to the View menu. Here we see that we are in the Predefined View called “Basic”. Each window has two arrows containing + signs.
Page 161 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A fifth window has been added, and is automatically assigned the number 5. (The window number, which is displayed in the Window Title region, is used when sending SCPI commands to that window). Note the * that now appears next to Basic in the View menu, indicating that you are now in the modified Basic View.
Page 162 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A panel drops down, containing a Data control for specifying window results. Some measurements, such as LTE-A in this example, also provide controls on this dropdown for specifying other window parameters, such as the Component Carrier and Data Format, Tap the Data control and you will see a list of available results for the window.
Page 163 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Choose the result you want and tap OK. Here we have chosen IQ Meas Time from the Demod group: Your new, edited User View is now ready to use. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 164: To Resize Or Rearrange Windows In A View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17.2 To Resize or Rearrange Windows in a View Sometimes you may wish to resize a window. To do this go back into the View Editor and note the large, translucent white circles along the edges of the draggable borders.
Page 165 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The outline of the window appears as it is being dragged. When you start to drag a window, target symbols appear in the other windows: If you drop a window on one of the targets, it swaps positions with the target window.
Page 166 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you hover over one of the stripes it gets dimmer, to show the position the window being dragged will take on. If you release a window over an inner stripe, the window you are dragging and the window over which you were hovering resize to share the space the target window originally occupied.
Page 167: To Delete A Window From A View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor In either case, one or more of the remaining windows resize to occupy the space formerly occupied by the window you were dragging. 2.17.3 To Delete a Window from a View The View Editor also lets you delete a window. To do this, tap one of the circled red X’s, as shown below.
Page 168: To Save A User View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you are finished with it, you can restore the Layout to the default for Basic by pressing “Restore Layout to Default”. Or you can save your edited View as a “User View” (if you exit the measurement without saving the edited View, the instrument will save it for you as a User View called “Autosaved”).
Page 169 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you tap “Done”, the View is saved: Notice the User View region which has appeared on the menu panel above, with the new User View called “My New View. Notice also that “Basic” has returned to its original, unedited state and the * is gone from its name.
Page 170 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Layout to Default” is grayed out. Note also that if you go to the Mode/Meas dialog, you will see the User View there as well: When naming a new View, you must choose a name that is not already in use for any User View in any measurement;...
Page 171 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The following is a full list of all MeasName parameters. Measurement Name SCPI ID ACPower ACP, Adjacent Channel Power AM Depth Amplitude Probability Distribution AUDDist Audio Distortion AUDFreq Audio Frequency AUDLevel Audio Level AUDSinad Audio SINAD Automatic Direction Finder CHPower...
Page 172 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID LSEQuencer List Sequencer LIST List Sweep LPLot Log Plot LORA LoRa (CSS) Demodulation Marker Beacon Mod Accuracy Modulation Analysis MODDist Modulation Distortion MODRate Modulation Rate MODSinad Modulation SINAD MONitor Monitor Spectrum NFIGure Noise Figure OBWidth...
Page 173: To Rename A User View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID Transmit Analysis PVTime Transmit On/Off Power TXPower Transmit Power (Burst Power) TRFLevel Tuned RF Level TTRF Tuned RF Level with Tracking ETSPur Tx Band Spur VHF Omni-Directional Range Examples: – The User View file for the Swept SA measurement is SA.SANalyzer.layout –...
Page 174: To Delete All User Views
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 3. Select the View tab 4. Tap Delete User View 2.17.7 To Delete All User Views You can delete all User Views by tapping “Delete All User Views.” The default view becomes the current view for the Measurement if a User View was the current view when this control was pressed.
Page 175 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor selected in the View menu. These switches are grayed out if you are in a modified View or a User View. Since only one of these switches can be on at a time, and because these switches turn off on a Preset, User Views offer a superior way of adding windows than using the switches.
Page 176 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18 Multiscreen You can configure up to 16 different Screens at a time. Normally, you only see one Screen, and the set of configured screens is shown across the top of the display in a series of "Screen Tabs"...
Page 177 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen While in Multiscreen View, the button changes from a black background to a blue background: To exit Multiscreen view, tap the button again. Multiscreen View cannot be activated if only one screen is configured. Each Screen contains one Mode, each Mode contains one Measurement, and each Measurement contains a number of Windows arranged in Views.
Page 178 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen – Each Screen has a tab that contains the name of the Mode and Measurement in the box and a number associated with the instance of that Mode. You can enter a custom Screen name that replaces the Mode name, by going into the Mode/Meas dialog –...
Page 179 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen Preset Returns the name of the active screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) You can obtain a list of currently configured Screens. This permits your remote program to manage screens for selection, renaming, or deletion. :INSTrument:SCReen:CATalog? Remote Command...
Page 180 2 User Interface 2.19 Fullscreen 2.19 Fullscreen The Fullscreen button is in the "Control Bar" on page 137, at the lower right corner of the display. When Full Screen is pressed the measurement window expands horizontally over the entire instrument display. The screen graticule area expands to fill the available display area.
Page 181 X-Series Signal Analyzers Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Spectrum Analyzer Mode is used for general purpose measurements. It consists of the Swept SA measurement, plus a set of measurements that are collectively referred to as the PowerSuite. Swept SA Measurement Measurement SCPI ID...
Page 182 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurements in this Mode other than Swept SA are available only if you have licenses N9060EM1E, N9060ES1E and N90EMPSMB, installed in your instrument Status Bits/OPC Changing Modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power-on defaults. dependencies Therefore, event or condition register masks must be re-established after a Mode change Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 183 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.1 Measurement Commands 3.1 Measurement Commands Commands for selecting each measurement are listed below. Commands relating to Views and Windows for each measurement are described in the documentation for that measurement. Example Having selected SA Mode, you can select the measurement using the following commands: :CONFigure:SANalyzer Swept SA :CONFigure:CHPower...
Page 184 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The Swept SA measurement lets you perform “traditional” Spectrum Analysis, that is, Swept and Zero Span measurements, as well as “Swept FFT” analysis (FFT analysis presented as though it were swept). Swept Spectrum Analysis (Freq Domain) The instrument sweeps the LO to generate a heterodyned IF signal that can be detected to analyze the signal content of a range of frequencies.
Page 185 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Note that, in general, :CONF:<Measurement> resets the specified measurement settings to their defaults. X-Series permits the addition of the NDEFault node to the command, which prevents a measurement preset after a measurement switch. The tables below list measurement commands for this measurement.
Page 186 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Data Returned Marker 2 value (y) Marker 3 value (y) Marker 4 value (y) Marker 5 value (y) Marker 6 value (y) Marker 7 value (y) Marker 8 value (y) Marker 9 value (y) Marker 10 value (y) Marker 11 value (y) Marker 12 value (y)
Page 187 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Data Returned 1>,… This matches the data format of a saved Spectrogram Meas Results file If a Spectrogram results query is requested and the Spectrogram is not on, an error event is generated, “Settings Conflict;...
Page 188 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2.1.1 Normal Windows: "Spectrum" on page 190 Single window view of the frequency domain or zero span. This is the classic SA view. This is also the view into which the instrument switches whenever you do anything that causes the frequency limits to change, for example: –...
Page 189 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement For more about Trace Zoom, see the window description for "Zoomed Trace" on page 192. :DISP:VIEW TZO Example 3.2.1.4 Zone Span Windows: "Spectrum" on page 190, "Zone Spectrum" on page 191 In this view, the screen is split into two windows. The top window is a normal spectrum analyzer window, and the bottom window (Zone Window) shows a window whose span represents a region (zone) within the top window.
Page 190 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The Zone Spectrum window cannot be added using the Result dropdown. To add a Zone Spectrum window, select the "Zone Span" on page 189 View. For more about using the Window Title dropdown to change the window result or the Edit View screen to add and rearrange windows, see "View Editor"...
Page 191 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – When a Zone Spectrum window is also displayed, as in the Zone Span View, an orange shaded region appears in the Spectrum window, representing the region occupied by the Zone Spectrum window –...
Page 192 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement the Zone Span view, the focus is always in the Zone Window, so it is the window that is updating. To change the focus, tap another window. Single and Continuous settings apply, so if the instrument is in Single, no sweep actually happens until it is initiated, or you go to Continuous.
Page 193 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement points more clearly, particularly when the trace data in the top window is very dense (sweep points much greater than 1000). The zoom region is indicated by a blue shading. In the top window, this indicates which subset of the data is zoomed in the bottom window.
Page 194 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Transition Rules When you enter the Trace Zoom view, the top window takes on all of the traces, markers and settings that were present in the Normal view. Zoom Center is the same as the instrument Center Frequency, and Zoom Span is 10 % of the instrument Span.
Page 195 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Although all 6 traces can be used in the trace window, it is the data from the “live” Trace 1 that goes into Display Trace 0 and then into the Waterfall window. Thus, the spectrogram represents the history of Trace 1;...
Page 196 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement case it is cleared out when you start sweeping again. Restart clears out all spectrogram traces and start over. The Waterfall display is also cleared on exit from the Spectrogram View, so every time you enter the Spectrogram View, the Waterfall window is empty.
Page 197 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Spectrogram when Single is pressed, making the behavior similar to that of the Normal view – In Spectrogram View, Sweep Points are limited to a maximum of 1001 due to memory concerns. On entry to this view, if the number of points is greater than 1001, it is forced to 1001;...
Page 198 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement point was gathered, relative to the start point. Each trace is time stamped as it starts, and this time is remembered for each trace. As successive traces appear their start times get successively larger, relative to the start time of the oldest trace. If a marker is placed on the live trace and its readout is set to Time, the time of this marker will increment by about the sweep time for every new sweep.
Page 199 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :TRACe:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TIME? can be used to retrieve the time that the current trace in the spectrogram started. Markers in Spectrogram In Spectrogram View, you can put markers on any trace in the Waterfall window. To put a marker on a particular trace in the Waterfall window, set Display Trace to the trace upon which you want the marker, then position the marker as desired on Trace 1 in the trace window.
Page 200 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement When you leave Spectrogram View, all Trace 1 Markers that were not on Display Trace 0 are turned OFF. 3.2.2.5 Marker Table Window #5 Displays a table containing detailed information about all of the markers in the current measurement.
Page 201 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Note that turning on Peak Table with the Peak Table switch turns off any of the other switched windows (Marker Table, Gate, Measure at Marker). Also note that the Peak Table switch is unavailable in all views except Normal; in that case you have to use the Window Title dropdown to add a Peak Table window.
Page 202 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement View Size Position "Gate View On/Off" on page 2686 Half height, full width Bottom The Gate window is turned on or off by "Gate View On/Off" on page 2686 in the Trigger menu, or it can be selected from the Data control on the Window Title dropdown.
Page 203 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? Example Set the reference level to 20 dBm, which displays in the current Y axis unit. For example, if the Y axis unit is dBmV, then 126.99 dBmV is displayed: :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 20 dBm Couplings If you reduce the attenuation, the instrument may have to lower the reference level to keep it below its...
Page 204 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Scale/Div For measurements that support a logarithmic Y-Axis, Scale/Div sets the height of one division of the graticule in the current Y-Axis unit. Scale/Div also determines the displayed amplitude range in the log plot graph. Since there are usually 10 vertical graticule divisions in the display, the total amplitude range of the graph is typically 10x this amount.
Page 205 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement In log scale, the Scale/Div is shown in the upper left side of the display. In Lin mode, no annotation is displayed Display Scale Selects a linear or logarithmic vertical scale for the display and for remote data readout: LOGarithmic The vertical graticule divisions are scaled in logarithmic units.
Page 206 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement set to Lin and you set Y Axis Unit to V, pressing Display Scale (Lin) sets the Y Axis Unit to V. Pressing Display Scale (Log) again sets the Y Axis Unit back to dBm. If an Amplitude Correction is being applied that has an associated Transducer Unit, all selections but Xducer Unit are grayed-out.
Page 207 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Unit Example Notes DBUV dBmA :UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is dBmA. The unit dBuA can also appear as a DBUA Transducer Unit dBpW :UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBpW DBPW Remote Interface Examples Command examples and details appear in the table below.
Page 208 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Unit Example Notes Unit) and the Transducer Unit for that Correction is not None "Transducer Unit" on page 209 :UNIT:POW Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBG (dB relative to one Gauss).
Page 209 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Set the following: – Display Scale (Lin) – Y Axis Unit, Volts – Ref Level, 100 mV (10 mV/div) This sets the top line to 100 mV and the bottom line to 0 V, so each vertical division represents 10 mV.
Page 210 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement And on the control it looks like this: If a Transducer Unit is set, it is displayed as Xducer Unit in the Y Axis Unit NOTE dropdown. However, you can only change the Transducer Unit via the Edit Correction dialog in the Input/Output, Corrections menu.
Page 211 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The on/off switch turns this function on and off. Setting a value for Reference Level Offset turns the function ON. "More Information" on page 211 :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? Example Set Reference Level Offset to 12.7 dB. The only valid suffix is dB. If no suffix is sent, dB is assumed: :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS 12.7 Preset 0 dBm...
Page 212 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected...
Page 213 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control. Dependencies In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, unavailable when I/Q is the selected input. Replaced by the Range tab in that case Dual-Attenuator Configurations Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator...
Page 214 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range, so you are given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages.
Page 215 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement On the Meas Bar, the field “Atten” displays as follows: – If the sweep is entirely < 50 GHz, the value shown after “Atten:” is equal to Mech Atten + Elec Atten + Full Range Atten –...
Page 216 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Auto/Man is remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled. This is described in more detail in "Elec Atten" on page 1960 "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 217 for more information on the Auto/Man functionality Couplings...
Page 217 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement For example: Dual-Attenuator configuration: Atten: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the electronic attenuation is at 14 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: A: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the “soft” attenuation is at 14 dB (see below for definition of “soft”...
Page 218 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Note that in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator, this switch is only shown when the Electronic Attenuator is disabled. In other measurements, Mech Atten has no Auto/Man function. In these measurements, no switch is shown on the Mech Atten control: Mech Atten also appears with no switch, as above, in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator but when the Electronic Attenuator is enabled.
Page 219 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement control and the Meas Bar The electronic attenuator, and the “soft” attenuation function provided in Single-Attenuator config- urations, are unavailable above the low band (0-3.6 GHz, 0-3.4 GHz, 0-3 GHz, depending on the model). If the low band range is from 0-3.6 GHz, and Stop Frequency of the instrument is > 3.6 GHz, then the Enabled/Disabled section of the Elec Atten control will be and grayed-out "Internal Preamp"...
Page 220 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :POW:EATT:STAT? Preset (Disabled) for Swept SA measurement (Enabled) for all other measurements that support the electronic attenuator The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band can change based on the NOTE selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it).
Page 221 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation Examples in the Dual-Attenuator configuration: –...
Page 222 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI, and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known.
Page 223 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <real> Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]? :POW:MIX:RANG -15 dBm Example :POW:MIX:RANG? Dependencies Only appears in Swept SA and RTSA measurements Preset -10 dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state -50 dBm 0 dBm Max Mixer Lvl Rules Lets you optimize the Max Mixer Level setting for certain kinds of measurements.
Page 224: Meas Bar
Only appears in the Swept SA and RTSA measurements NORM Preset 3.2.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC.
Page 225 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Adjust Range for Min Clipping Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum. This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed.
Page 226 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Peak-to-Average Ratio Used with "Range (Non-attenuator models)" on page 1975 to optimize the level control in the instrument. The value is the ratio, in dB, of the peak power to the average power of the signal to be measured. A ratio of 0 should be used for sinusoidal signals;...
Page 227 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Mixer Lvl Offset This is an advanced setting to adjust target Range at the input mixer, which in turn affects the signal level in the instrument’s IF. This setting can be used when additional optimization is needed after setting "Peak-to-Average Ratio"...
Page 228 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the instrument first performs a peak search, and then performs centering on the marker’s center frequency. The value displayed on "Preselector Adjust" on page 1979 changes to reflect the new preselector tuning.
Page 229 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement search to find 2. If the selected marker is already On, the instrument attempts the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, so if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering is attempted, and an advisory message is generated 3.
Page 230 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement State Saved The Preselector Adjust value set by "Presel Center" on page 1978, or by manually adjusting Preselector Adjust Not saved in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle Min/Max –/+500 MHz [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust...
Page 231 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band, displayed in square brackets, NOTE can change based on the selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it). In certain models (such as N9042B &...
Page 232 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement LNA is an additional preamplifier that provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to "Internal Preamp" on page 1981. LNA provides lower system noise figure, especially at frequencies above 100 MHz, and can be operated up to the full range of 50 GHz instruments.
Page 233 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement µW Path Control Options for this control include µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB), Low Noise Path (Option LNP) and Full Bypass Enable in the High Band path circuits. When the µW Preselector is bypassed, flatness is improved, but will be subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals.
Page 234 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD | LNPath | MPBypass | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? :POW:MW:PATH LNP Example Enables the Low Noise path :POW:MW:PATH? Notes When "Presel Center" on page 1978 is performed, the instrument momentarily switches to the Standard Path, regardless of the setting of µW Path Control The DC Block will always be switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC.
Page 235 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Annotation In the Meas Bar, if the Standard path is chosen: µW Path: Standard If Low Noise Path is enabled but the LNP switch is not thrown: µW Path: LNP,Off If the Low Noise Path is enabled and the LNP switch is thrown: µW Path: LNP,On If the preselector is bypassed: µW Path: Bypass...
Page 236 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Always Presel Bypass Always Presel Bypass Spurious Always Standard Path Emissions WLAN Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Always Presel Bypass Analysis Spectral Flatness Always Presel Bypasss Power vs Time Always Presel Bypass...
Page 237 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Emissions Transmit On|Off Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and Info BW > 15 MHz, in Power which case choose Preselector Bypass Channel Quality Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Group Delay...
Page 238 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement whether or not the Low Noise Path Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Low Noise Path Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (>...
Page 239 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement There are other times where selecting the low noise path improves performance, too. Compression-limited measurements such as finding the nulls in a pulsed-RF spectrum can profit from the low noise path in a way similar to the TOI-limited measurement illustrated.
Page 240 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis.
Page 241 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement whenever Full Bypass Enable is selected, a warning message appears in the status bar: “Full Bypass Enabled, maximum safe input power reduced” Microwave Preselector Bypass Backwards Compatibility Example Bypass the microwave preselector: :POW:MW:PRES OFF Notes Included for Microwave Preselector Bypass backwards compatibility...
Page 242 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Settings Alert message in the error queue Software Preselection Provided in some instruments, either to compensate for issues with provided hardware preselection or to provide the preselection function when there is no hardware preselector.
Page 243 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Note that for N9042B+V3050A, in the Swept SA measurement, Software Preselection works even if the measurement is using an FFT Sweep Type. In measurements other than Swept SA, Software Preselection is not used if the measurement is using an FFT Sweep Type.
Page 244 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N. For each point in each trace, the smaller amplitude from the two traces is taken and placed in that point in the selected trace.
Page 245 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement wideband signals with occupied bandwidths up to 2 GHz. This increases the risk of images failing to be rejected, but improves the measurement speed [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:SWPResel:BW NORMal | NARRow Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:SWPResel:BW? :POW:SWPR:BW NARR Example Dependencies Only appears in N9041B and N9042B+V3050A.
Page 246 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Prefilter Presets Meas Mode Preset SPEC BASIC BASIC, WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA EVMQ WCDMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA...
Page 247 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2.4.1 Settings This is the only tab in the BW menu. Res BW Activates the resolution bandwidth active function, which lets you manually set the resolution bandwidth (RBW) of the instrument. Normally, Res BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Res BW to Span using the ratio set by the Span:3 dB RBW control.
Page 248 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement When a CISPR or MIL EMI Standard is in use, Res BW is coupled to "Center Frequency" on page 281 and not to "Span" on page 287, and this is true even in Zero Span Preset Auto (unless noted in the table below) State Saved...
Page 249 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Video BW Lets you change the instrument post-detection filter (VBW or “video bandwidth”) from 1 Hz to 8 MHz in approximately 10% steps. In addition, a wide-open video filter bandwidth may be chosen by selecting 50 MHz. The VBW is annotated at the bottom of the display, in the center.
Page 250 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state 1 Hz 50 MHz Annunciation A “#” mark appears before “VBW” in the annotation when it is not coupled Annotation In the bottom center of the screen, “VBW <value> <units>” indicates the current video bandwidth value.
Page 251 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement VBW:3dB RBW Selects the ratio between the video bandwidth and the equivalent 3 dB resolution bandwidth to be used for setting Video BW when VBW is in Auto. VBW:3dB RBW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Video BW:3 dB Res BW ratio to "Detector"...
Page 252 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement First, if Source Mode is set to “Tracking”: Use 1.0 Otherwise, go through the following list of detector numbers and find the lowest numbered detector being used on any active traces (traces for which Update is On): 1.
Page 253 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Note that because the above couplings depend on which traces are active, they are re-examined whenever any trace goes active or inactive, except when this leaves no traces active. Transitioning to the state where no traces are active should not affect the couplings;...
Page 254 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement RBW Filter Type Selects the type for the resolution bandwidth filters. In the X-Series, the RBW Filter BW menu lets you choose between a Gaussian and Flat Top filter shape, for varying measurement conditions.
Page 255 Selects the type of filter bandwidth used to specify the width of the Gaussian RBW filters. Historically, the Gaussian Res BW filters in HP/Agilent/Keysight spectrum analyzers were specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart.
Page 256 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Filter BW SCPI Example Displayed bandwidth of a filter with 1 kHz –3 dB bandwidth Noise :BAND:TYPE 1.06 kHz NOIS Impulse :BAND:TYPE IMP 1.48 kHz "More Information" on page 256 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:TYPE DB3 | DB6 | IMPulse | NOISe Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:TYPE? :BAND:TYPE NOIS...
Page 257 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3. The equivalent Noise bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth of a rectangular filter with the same peak gain which would pass the same power for noise signals 4.
Page 258 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement bandwidth is 1.0 kHz is the same as the filter whose –6 dB bandwidth is 1.41 kHz, whose Noise bandwidth is 1.06 kHz, and whose Impulse bandwidth is 1.48 kHz. As you cycle through these various filter bandwidths the filter does not change, but the way the filter is annotated and the value which appears in the active function area and on the control does.
Page 259 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement As with the standard set of Res BWs, there is a set of specific Res BWs available when Wide Bandwidths is ON. In Zero Span, these are: – Wideband IFs with information bandwidth less than 160 MHz : 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, 50 MHz, 60 MHz, 70 MHz –...
Page 260 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement TIME form of this command (below) can be used to determine the time that the current trace in the spectrogram started, or to select as the display trace the trace whose start time is closest to the specified time. This time displays on Display Trace when Trace Selection is set to Time.
Page 261 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :TRACe:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TIME <time> Backwards Compatibility SCPI Couple Marker To Display Trace Couples the marker to the selected "Display Trace" on page 259. When OFF, this lets you fix the marker to the Display Trace that was active when the marker was turned on.
Page 262 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 263 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Dependencies Only appears when the Waterfall window is visible, and either the Waterfall or Spectrum window is selected If the command is sent at any other time, it is accepted without error, but you will not see the result until you once again display the Waterfall window Examples An example of Ref Hue in action appears below.
Page 264 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Here is the same display with Reference Hue, "Reference Hue Position" on page 267, and "Bottom Hue Position" on page 268 all adjusted to exclude unwanted signals and optimally show desired signals: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 265 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Reference Hue Adjusts the hue at the top of the spectrogram color bar. The Spectrogram color bar is the bar placed next to the trace display to map colors into the Spectrogram window.
Page 266 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Explaining Hue concept To understand how Reference Hue works, we need to understand the concept of “hue”. The hues of colors run from 0 to 359 (360 is the same as 0) as shown on the color wheel below: Hue 0 is Red (255,0,0), Hue 120 is Green (0,255,0) and Hue 240 is Blue (0,0,255).
Page 267 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Here are other examples of Ref Hue settings: Reference Hue Position Lets you adjust where, as a percentage of the graticule, the "Reference Hue" on page 265 appears. Above the Reference Hue Position, any amplitudes simply map as black.
Page 268 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement As an example, here is what the color bar looks like when Reference Hue Position is set to 80%: "Color Adjust" on page 261 for more examples :DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:REFerence <integer> Remote Command :DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:REFerence? :DISP:VIEW:SPEC:REF 60 Example Preset...
Page 269 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement "Color Adjust" on page 261 for more examples :DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:BOTTom <integer> Remote Command :DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:BOTTom? :DISP:VIEW:SPEC:BOTT 40 Example Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Cannot go any higher than 90%, or "Reference Hue Position" on page 267 –...
Page 270 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Select Display Line Lets you select the display line currently being controlled by "Display Line" on page 270. Preset Display Line Activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference line. The line’s vertical position corresponds to its amplitude value.
Page 271 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y:DLINe[1]|2|…|4:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y:DLINe[1]|2|…|4:STATe? Preset Select Freq Line Lets you select the display line currently being controlled by "Freq Line" on page 271. Preset Freq Line Activates an adjustable vertical line that is used as a visual reference line.
Page 272 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Auto Function :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X:FLINe[1]|2|…|4:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X:FLINe[1]|2|…|4:STATe? Preset Select Time Line Lets you select the display line currently being controlled by "Time Line" on page 272. Preset Time Line Activates an adjustable vertical line that is used as a visual reference line.
Page 273 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Preset Time Line 1 selected, OFF, and set to 1 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Auto Function :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X:TLINe[1]|2|…|4:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X:TLINe[1]|2|…|4:STATe? Preset 3.2.5.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement.
Page 274 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]? :DISP:ANN:SCR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed-out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Trace Annotation...
Page 275: Display Enable (Remote Command Only)
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Frequency Annotation Turns on and off the absolute frequency annotation in the main display for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Frequency Annotation on/off is supported. The affected annotations include Center Frequency, Start/Stop Frequency, Frequency Offset, Marker Frequency.
Page 276 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 1. To increase speed as much as possible by freeing the instrument from having to update the display 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3. For security purposes If you have turned off the display: –...
Page 277 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Preset :SYST:DEF MISC, but not affected by *RST :SYSTem:PRESet Set by State Saved Not saved in instrument state :SYST:PRES :DISPlay:ENABle Backwards no longer turns on as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.2.5.3 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views.
Page 278 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement View SCPI cannot be used while Display is disabled” is generated Backwards The legacy node Compatibility :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic.
Page 279 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 280 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 281: Frequency
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2.6 Frequency Lets you control the Frequency parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements in the current Mode – they do not change as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global”...
Page 282 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement directly set Center Frequency for a specific input (see "RF Center Frequency" on page 285 "Ext Mix Center Freq" on page 286). Center Frequency is remembered as you go from input to input. Thus, you can set a Center Frequency of 10 GHz with the RF Input selected, change to BBIQ and set a Center Frequency of 20 MHz, then switch to External Mixing and set a Center Frequency of 60 GHz.
Page 283 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement work correctly without requiring any special handling for out-of-range conditions Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input "Center Frequency Presets" on page 283 "Ext Mix Center Freq" on page 286 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max...
Page 284 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset Preset above) 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9415A) 6.6 GHz 1 GHz...
Page 285 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Tracking Min Freq If above this Freq, Stop Freq Max Freq (clips to this freq when turn (can't tune Generator clipped to this Freq when TG TG on and can’t tune below above) Option turned on...
Page 286 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Instrument Types Value VXT model M9421A 55.000005 MHz VXT models M9410A/11A 6.505 kHz with Option 330.000005 MHz without Option LFE 330.000005 MHz VXT model M9415A 330.000005 MHz M8920A 80.005 kHz All other instruments –79.999995 MHz Unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum frequency of the Source See table above.
Page 287 When in Zero Span, you can return to your last Swept Span by pressing the Swept Span/Zero Span toggle on Span. (This replaces the Last Span function found on older HP/Agilent/Keysight Analyzers.) We use the term Swept Span to mean spans other than Zero Span, even...
Page 288 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If Span is set to a value greater than the maximum allowable span of the instrument, an error message is generated indicating the data is out of range and was clipped to upper limit.
Page 289 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Annotation Span <value> appears on the first line of the annotation in the lower right corner of display Status Bits/OPC Overlapped if Signal Track is on (OPC does not return or clear until the zooming has completed for the dependencies new span) Span Presets...
Page 290 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Mode Preset Value WCDMA 24.6848 MHz WIMAX OFDMA 50 MHz 4.5 MHz TD-SCDMA 8 MHz 1xEVDO 4.05 MHz DVB-T/H 40 MHz DTMB (CTTB) 72 MHz ISDB-T 30 MHz CMMB 72 MHz LTE, LTETDD, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, MSR 25 MHz Digital Cable TV 40 MHz...
Page 291 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Couplings Switching to Zero Span: – Turns off Signal Track – Turns off the auto-coupling of Res BW and sweep time – Places the instrument in Center/Span frequency entry mode When you enter Zero Span, the instrument changes the displayed frequency span to 0 Hz.
Page 292 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Span depends on the currently selected input. For example, when using external mixing, Full Span changes the frequency to the Preset frequency range specified for the selected external mixing band. Pressing this control while in Zero Span returns the instrument to Swept Span. [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL Remote Command...
Page 293 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement "Source Mode" on page 457 is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Start Freq is therefore limited by the limits of the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range; clipped to source max/min”...
Page 294 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement parameters While in External Mixing, the maximum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if doubled) times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup.
Page 295 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement max/min” if these limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of Source Numerator, Source Denominator, and Power Sweep Couplings The four parameters Center Frequency, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others.
Page 296 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement parameters While in External Mixing, the maximum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if doubled) times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup.
Page 297 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:CENTer <frequency> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:CENTer? :FREQ:TZO:CENT 20 MHz Example Dependencies Only appears if the Zoomed Trace window is visible Grayed-out in Zero Span. If the SCPI command is sent in Zero Span, an error is reported Couplings The center frequency for the lower window is limited by the start and stop frequencies in the upper window.
Page 298 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Span continues to increase, "Zoom Center" on page 296 changes to keep the zoom region from leaving the upper window Dependencies Only appears if the Zoomed Trace window is visible Grayed-out in Zero Span. If the SCPI command is sent in Zero Span, an error is reported Preset On entry to Trace Zoom, Zoom Span is 10% of the span of the upper window.
Page 299 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Zone Center cannot go so low as to force Zone Left to be <0 The maximum Zone Center frequency is the same as the maximum instrument Center Frequency, which is basically the instrument maximum frequency –5 Hz. See the table under Center Frequency Annotation As the Center Freq of the Zone Window Status Bits/OPC...
Page 300: Cf Step
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement CF Step Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for "Center Frequency"...
Page 301: Freq Offset
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Freq Offset Lets you set a frequency offset value to account for frequency conversions outside of the instrument. This value is added to the display readout of the marker frequency, center frequency, start frequency, stop frequency, and all other absolute frequency settings in the instrument including frequency count.
Page 302 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement without taking new data. If a trace is exported with a nonzero Freq Offset, the exported data will contain NOTE the trace data with the offset applied. Therefore, if that trace were to be imported back into the instrument, you would want Freq Offset to be 0, or the offset would be applied again to data that is already offset.
Page 303 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Span), it changes to Center Frequency When switching to LOG, if Start Freq is 0 Hz, it is changed to 10 Hz Preset State Saved Saved in Instrument State [:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic Backwards Compatibility SCPI More Information The log graticule is drawn to optimize the display based on the range of frequencies...
Page 304 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Signal Track (Span Zoom) When Marker 1 is placed on a signal, and Signal Track is pressed, the marker remains on the signal while the instrument retunes the center frequency to the marker frequency.
Page 305 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement the trace Marker 1 is on is put into view, Signal Track is turned off and the Signal Track control grayed-out. Whenever the trace Marker 1 is on is not updating, the Signal Track control is grayed-out Only available in the Swept SA measurement Couplings Can only function properly if the trace Marker 1 is on, is in Trace Update = Active.
Page 306: Marker
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement happens, the act of changing the span restarts averaging but the first average trace is the last trace of the auto zoom. This function is intended to track signals with a frequency that is changing (drifting), and an amplitude that is not changing.
Page 307 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If you tap or click on one of the menu items, it will perform the corresponding function: – Normal, Delta, Fixed, or Off set the Marker Mode (see "Marker Mode" on page 314) –...
Page 308 "Peak Search All Traces" on page 321) In earlier HP/Agilent/Keysight analyzers, markers stayed at the same position on NOTE the display even when you changed frequency. In the X-Series, markers stay at the frequency they are set to, even if you change Center Frequency. So, your marker will move, possibly offscreen, when you change frequency.
Page 309 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement superior method for several reasons, but it may take some getting used to if you are used to placing a marker at center screen and then changing Center Frequency and having the marker stay there. See "Marker Backwards Compatibility"...
Page 310 Marker Backwards Compatibility – In earlier HP/Agilent/Keysight analyzers, markers were position markers, which means that Normal and Delta markers stayed at the same screen position when X Axis parameters were changed. So, a marker at center screen stayed at center...
Page 311 13 GHz, and then you change Start Freq so that bucket 500 is no longer 13 GHz, the marker will stay at 13 GHz, not at bucket 500! This is important to realize as it differs from the behavior of past HP/Agilent/Keysight analyzers. :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|24:X:POSition <real> Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|24:X:POSition?
Page 312 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning The query returns the marker’s absolute X Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal or Fixed. It returns the offset from the marker’s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta.
Page 313 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated Preset Trace value at center of screen.
Page 314 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Preset Number of traces stored is limited to 300 Querying the Marker Z Axis Value (Remote Query Only) Queries the Z-axis time value of the marker in the Spectrogram View only. The marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker.
Page 315 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The SCPI command in the table below selects the marker and sets the marker control mode as described under Normal, Delta, Fixed and Off, below. All interactions and dependencies detailed under the control description are enforced when the remote command is sent.
Page 316 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement More Information Value SCPI Notes Normal A Normal marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value DELT Delta In Delta mode, the marker result shows the relative result between the selected (Delta) marker...
Page 317 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – the selected marker becomes a Delta marker – If the marker’s reference marker is off, it is turned on as a Fixed marker at the selected marker’s X Axis value on the selected marker’s trace and takes on the selected marker’s X Axis value and Y-axis result.
Page 318 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Marker Table When set to ON, the display is split into a measurement window and a marker data display window. For each marker that is on, information is displayed in the data display window, which includes the marker number, control mode, trace number, X axis scale, X axis value, and the Y-axis result.
Page 319 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALC:MARK:AOFF Example Couplings In the Swept SA measurement, sets the selected marker to 1 Couple Markers When this function is ON, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every other marker that is not Fixed or Off. By “equal X Axis movement”, we mean that we preserve the difference between each marker’s X Axis value (in the fundamental x-axis units of the trace that marker is on), and the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units).
Page 320 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Pressing the Peak Search hardkey automatically moves you to the Peak Search NOTE page of the Marker menu and performs a peak search. Pressing the Peak Search tab once you are already in the Marker menu does not perform a peak search.
Page 321 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALC:MARK2:X? :SYST:ERR? can be used to query the errors to determine if a peak is found. The message “No peak found” is returned after an unsuccessful search Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker More Information The behavior of Peak Search depends on settings under the Peak Search Config tab.
Page 322 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the peak that is next lower in amplitude than the current marker value. Only peaks that meet all enabled peak criteria are considered (see "Pk Search Config" on page 326).
Page 323 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Next Pk Left Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak left of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria (see "Pk Search Config" on page 326). If there is no valid peak to the left of the current marker position, a “No peak found”...
Page 324 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If the selected marker is Off, a Delta type marker is turned on, and the peak-to-peak search is done. If the selected marker is on, but it is not a Delta marker, then it is changed to Delta, which turns on the reference marker if needed, and then it performs the peak-to-peak function.
Page 325 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Continuous Peak Search Turns Continuous Peak Search on or off. When ON, a peak search is automatically performed for the selected marker after each sweep. The rules for finding the peak are the same as for Peak Search, including the use of the peak criteria rules. If no valid peak is found, a “No peak found”...
Page 326 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement When Continuous Peak Search is turned on for a marker, a small “hat” is placed above the marker. 3.2.7.4 Pk Search Config Contains controls that allow you to setup the Peak Search functions. Since the Pk Search Config functions are independent of the selected Marker, the Select Marker control does not display while in Pk Search Config.
Page 327 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Set the threshold to -60 dBm: :CALC:MARK:PEAK:THR -60 dBm Dependencies When Ref Level Offset changes, Peak Threshold must change by the same amount Couplings Whenever you adjust the value of Peak Threshold manually, "Pk Threshold Line"...
Page 328 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement In the event that a sequence of trace points with precisely the same values NOTE represents the maximum, the leftmost point is found. If a signal comes onto the screen falling and falls all the way to the threshold without ever rising, it is considered a peak at the far-left edge of the display.
Page 329 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Auto Excursion Toggles whether "Peak Excursion" on page 327 is determined automatically or manually. The default is ON, which means that Peak Excursion is automatically calculated. Manually setting the Peak Excursion value sets Auto Peak Excursion to OFF. :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:AUTO[:STATe] 0 | 1 | ON | OFF Remote Command...
Page 330 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement This function is automatically set (thus turning on the Peak Threshold line) whenever the value of Peak Threshold or Peak Excursion becomes the active function, unless Peak Threshold is OFF. It is automatically set whenever Peak Threshold is set to OFF.
Page 331 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement criteria. This would be useful if, for example, you did not want to perform the Peak Search at all unless there was a signal on the screen above a certain level. When Highest Peak is selected, pressing Peak Search simply finds the highest peak on the marker’s trace.
Page 332 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement command can also be used to sort the peaks found using :CALCulate:DATA:PEAKs. You can also sort the table and change the order between ascending and descending by tapping a column header once or twice. :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQuency | AMPLitude | DELTa Remote Command...
Page 333 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement used to exclude peaks) Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state More Information "Display Line" on page 270 is ON, the Peak Table can be selected to include all peaks, or only those above the Display Line, or only those below the Display Line. See the figures below to understand what happens if both Display Line and Peak Threshold are ON.
Page 334 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALC:MARK:PEAK:MPE? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Δ to Limit Selects the Limit to be used for the Δ to Limit column in the Peak Table, and turns the Δ to Limit column on and off. When ON, this column shows the difference between each peak and the specified Limit.
Page 335 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The following query is provided for backwards compatibility with ESA and PSA. It is recommended that you use :CALC:DATA:PEAK instead. Returns the signal peaks by frequency or by amplitude. This query uses only Trace 1 data.
Page 336 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as the “reference marker” for that marker. This attribute is set by Marker, Properties, "Relative To" on page 335.
Page 337 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Preset AUTO = Marker Preset (selected when a marker is turned Off): Auto (see below). In most measurements, the Auto setting results in Frequency being the preset readout Note that the marker trace should first be preset according to the Marker Trace rules before this preset is applied State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 338 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement remembered a different X Axis Scale (formerly called Readout) for each domain, and the choices of X Axis Scale were restricted. These restrictions were based on the current domain of the instrument. When in Auto, the X-Axis Scale is Frequency if the Marker Trace is a frequency domain trace, Time if the Marker Trace is a time domain trace.
Page 339 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Specifying a Marker Trace manually or with this command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Auto InitializeOFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off, it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off, it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
Page 340 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement placed The response to the query is 0 if OFF, 1 if Couplings The state of Auto Initialize is not affected by "Auto Couple" on page 2017 Auto Initialize is set to by Preset or All Markers Off If Auto Initialize is for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set...
Page 341 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to Trace 2 when they turn on, put Trace 1 in View.
Page 342 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – Interval Density – Off For details of these options, see "Band Function" on page 342 Marker Frequency | Time This is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace. It is the same as "Marker Frequency | Time"...
Page 343 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Turn on Marker 1 as a band density marker: :CALC:MARK:FUNC BDEN Turn off marker functions for Marker 1: :CALC:MARK:FUNC OFF Return the current band function for marker 1. For Marker Noise, returns NOIS, for Band Power returns BPOW, and for Band Density returns BDEN: :CALC:MARK:FUNC? Return the y-axis value of marker 1, which means it returns the Band Function value if a Band Function...
Page 344 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Options The Band Functions are Marker Noise, Band Power, and Band Density, only one of which can be on for a given marker. Value SCPI Notes NOISe Marker When Marker Noise is on, the marker’s Y Axis Result is the average noise level, Noise normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth, in the band specified under the Band Adjust To guarantee accurate data for noise-like signals, a correction for equivalent noise...
Page 345 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. However, if the selected marker was Off, Marker Function Off had to be the selected function, and it remains so even after the marker is thus turned on, although you may then change it. Fixed marker functions In the case of a Fixed marker, it is not possible to turn on or change a band function.
Page 346 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement limitations in the instrument or in the controlling computer, the result is still considered valid. Band Function Backwards Compatibility To define the Band Power function, the ESA and PSA analyzers used Delta marker functionality with two markers, for example, Marker 1 and its Reference Marker, as shown below: The marker modes known as Span Pair and Delta Pair (Band Pair in ESA) were used...
Page 347 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement In X-Series the marker itself has a width attribute, which you set using the Band Span function. The marker shows “wings” that define the edges of the band in which the Band Power is being measured. You only need one marker, not a pair of markers, to completely define a Band Power function (making it possible to do Delta Band Power, which PSA and ESA could not do).
Page 348 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Marker Mode compatibility To setup Band Power measurements in the ESA and PSA, you had to send the :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE POSition|DELTa|BAND|SPAN|OFF command with either the BAND SPAN parameter, in order to turn on the marker control modes that let you use a pair of delta markers as Band Power markers.
Page 349 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Old command Aliased to :CALCulate:MARKer :CALCulate:MARKer [1]|2|…|4:X:STARt [1]|2|…|4:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT :CALCulate:MARKer :CALCulate:MARKer [1]|2|…|4:X:STOP [1]|2|…|4:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt Arbitrary Marker Pair functionality Another use case was to use the STARt and STOP commands to arbitrarily set the frequency (time) of a delta marker and its reference marker without being in Band Power mode.
Page 350 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:SPAN? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:STARt <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:STARt? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:STOP <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:STOP? They are aliased very similarly to the non-position commands (above) however a translation to/from trace points (buckets) is also performed: Old command Aliased to :CALCulate:MARKer :CALCulate:MARKer [1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:CENTer...
Page 351 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Band Span Sets the width of the span for the selected marker. The “Band Span” control name is used for all measurements that make frequency domain measurements (even if they have a time-domain mode, such as Zero Span). For measurements that have no Frequency Domain measurement mode, such as the Waveform measurement, this function is called “Interval Span”.
Page 352 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Backwards Compatibility Command Preset :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param> Backwards Compatibility :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|4:X:POSition:SPAN? SCPI Backwards The old command, Compatibility :CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:SPAN <param> Notes was used to set the span between a delta marker and its reference marker in trace points (buckets) in Span Pair mode.
Page 353 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument, the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz Couplings Changing Band Left necessarily changes Band Span and Band Center Band Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off, which means Band Left is set to the center value at this time...
Page 354 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Notes Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the right edge is moved, the left edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change Excess Active Function resolution may require up to 15 digits to allow sub-bucket resolution in narrow spans with many points.
Page 355 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Band Span Auto/Man Determines whether the Band Span for Marker Noise will track the instrument’s Span. When you choose any Band Function, and Band Span Auto/Man is in the Auto state, the Band Span is set to 5% of the screen width. Adjusting the Band Span sets Band Span Auto/Man to Man.
Page 356 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement changes. When the user adjusts the Marker Noise Band Span, Band Span Auto/Man is set to Manual. So, the legacy behavior is preserved, but now you can set the Marker Noise Span as well, and that setting is preserved when Span is changed N dB Points Turns N dB points on or off, and lets you set the N dB value.
Page 357 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The following queries return the following values: :CALC:BAND:RES? 400 kHz :CALC:BAND:RLEF? 99.8 MHz :CALC:BAND:RRIG? 100.2 MHz :CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult? Remote Command Example Set selected marker to 1: :CALC:MARK:AOFF Put marker 1 on peak: :CALC:MARK:MAX Turn on N dB for the selected marker (1): :CALC:BWID ON Set the offset to -3.01 dB:...
Page 358 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Command Example Return the rightmost X Axis value for the N dB band: :CALC:BWID:RRIG? Notes –100 returned if invalid reading More Information A marker should be placed on the peak of interest before turning on N dB points. The N dB points function looks for the two points on the marker’s trace closest to the marker’s X Axis value that are N dB below the marker’s amplitude, one above and the other below the marker’s X Axis value.
Page 359 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement N dB Points can be used to measure the bandwidth of a signal; it is commonly used in conjunction with a tracking generator to measure filter bandwidths. In one of the common use cases, the marker is placed on a peak, and the arrows are displayed N dB down the skirt from the marker on either side of the peak.
Page 360 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement arrow. If the instrument is unable to find data that is N dB below the marker on either side of the marker, the arrows are displayed at the indicator point of the marker, no value (---) is displayed as the result and –100 Hz returned remotely (see figure below): Some sample N dB scenarios are shown below to illustrate how the function works...
Page 361 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 362 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Measure at Marker When this control is pressed, the instrument executes one Measure at Marker function and then returns. Measure at Marker goes to the frequency of the selected marker and takes a reading with each of the three detectors selected in the Detectors menu, using the dwell times specified there, then displays the readings in a window on the display, using the current Y-Axis Unit.
Page 363 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Measure at Marker displays its information in a separate window that normally appears to the left of the measurement window. The Measure at Marker box shows the detector name for the selected detectors and Off for those not selected.
Page 364 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement value of (span/sweep points) then the Measure at Marker window will not display, but instead an advisory message, “Span per point too large, narrow span or increase RBW or number of points”.This means you have chosen a combination of RBW, span and sweep points that makes each trace point much wider than the RBW, so that the trace point in which the signal appears is an inadequately precise measure of its frequency—for example, with a 30 MHz to...
Page 365 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Instead, we can choose the frequency for the marker to higher resolution than the bucket resolution by interpolating from the trace data. This technique does not require another “zoom sweep” and thus will not misbehave with nonstationary signals like pulsed RF.
Page 366 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement RBW3dB = the 3 dB RBW, which is not normally the annotated RBW for EMC measurements, which are based on the 6 dB RBW. deltaA = the amplitude at the marker, in dBm, minus the amplitude of the bucket one to the left of the marker, in dBm.
Page 367 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement encounter emissions for which the defaults are not optimal. This is especially the case for emissions that vary slowly over time or have a slow repetition rate. By lengthening the dwell times, you can increase the likelihood of accurately measuring these low repetition rate signals.
Page 368 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Option SCPI Behavior (EMI Avg, RMS Avg, QPD) becomes selected; for all other detectors, the value of EMC Std that existed before Measure at Marker is used 2. RBW autocouples throughout Measure at Marker, even if RBW is set to Manual.
Page 369 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALC:MAM:PCEN ON Example Dependencies Not shown in models that do not include a preselector, such as Option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0 Preset [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Backwards...
Page 370 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Set the dwell time for Detector 3 to 400 ms: :CALC:MAM:DET3:DWEL 400 ms Preset 200 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state 1 ms 60 s [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:DWELl <dwell time> Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards Included for compatibility with E7400 and PSA option 239.
Page 371 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If the currently selected marker is not on when this control is pressed, it is turned on at the center of the screen as a Normal marker. :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|24[:SET]:CENTer Remote Command Example Set the Center Frequency of the instrument to the value of Marker 2: :CALC:MARK2:CENT Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker...
Page 372 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Dependencies Not available (control is grayed-out) when x-axis is the time domain Couplings All the usual couplings associated with setting Start Freq apply Mkr->Stop Changes Stop Freq to the frequency of the selected marker. The marker stays at this frequency, so it moves to the right edge of the display.
Page 373 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Notes to the reference level (in dBm). PSA would just assign the delta marker’s amplitude to the reference level, ignoring the reference marker altogether. X-Series products allow you to select either the reference or the delta marker individually.
Page 374 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Moves the zoom region so that it is centered at the selected marker in the top window. Zoom Span is not changed, except as necessary to keep the entire Zoom Region between the top window start and stop frequencies. The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zoom center frequency.
Page 375 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|…|24[:SET]:DTRAce Remote Command Example Move the Display Trace to Marker 2’s trace in the Waterfall window: :CALC:MARK2:DTRA Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker If the specified marker is Off, this command simply turns it on at the center of the screen, on the current Display Trace in the Waterfall window Dependencies Only appears when the Waterfall window is visible...
Page 376 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Return the counted frequency: :CALC:MARK2:FCO:X? Notes Fixed markers are not counted, but a Fixed marker will have a count stored in it if it is selected or is the reference marker for the selected marker. The count already in the marker is stored when the marker becomes fixed and if there is none or the marker moves (for example, Peak Search) it is counted and stored after the next sweep If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count is displayed when the marker is selected, and...
Page 377 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The decimal point location is fixed, without trailing zero suppression. It displays in units of Hz. The digits to the left of the decimal have leading zero suppression. For understandability, with more than 4 digits to the left of the decimal point, the digits are grouped in threes, from the decimal point left, with spaces between those groups of three.
Page 378 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Mixing is ON. Since all this happens between sweeps, you never see the instrument retuning to do the counts. If you wish to see the entered frequency of a counted marker it will appear in the active function area when that marker is selected (for Fixed markers, you must press Marker, Fixed to select Fixed markers, then press it a second time to view or adjust the x or y marker values).
Page 379 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement More Information about Counter When the counter is ON, the count (or the delta count) for the selected marker is displayed. The invalid data indicator (*) turns on until the completion of the first count. Marker Count frequency readings are corrected using the Freq Offset function (in some previous instruments, they were not).
Page 380: Meas Setup
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALC:MARK2:FCO:GAT 1e-2 Notes When Auto Couple is pressed, Gate Time is set to 100 ms This command causes the specified marker to become selected Preset 100 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state 1 us 500 ms Auto Function...
Page 381: Settings
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement In the Meas Setup menu, you may configure Averaging, by setting NOTE "Average/Hold Number" on page 381 "Average Type" on page 382. 3.2.8.1 Settings Contains frequently used Meas Setup functions to which you will want the fastest access.
Page 382 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Status Bits/OPC "Sweep" on page 1920for a discussion of the Sweeping, Measuring, Settling and OPC bits, and dependencies the Hi Sweep line. All are affected when a sequence is reset Backwards In older instruments, when changing the Average Count (now Average/Hold Number), you had to re- Compatibility start the trace at the beginning of a sweep to ensure valid average data.
Page 383 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Option SCPI Details Log-Power (Video) "Log-Pwr Avg (Video)" on page 384 Power (RMS) "Pwr Avg (RMS)" on page 385 SCALar Voltage averaging "Voltage Avg" on page 385 Also lets you choose Auto (default); see "Auto"...
Page 384 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Details of each averaging type appear below: Auto When Auto is selected, the instrument chooses the optimum type of averaging for the current instrument measurement settings. When one of the average types is selected manually, the instrument uses that type regardless of other instrument settings, and shows Man on the Average Type toggle.
Page 385 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Pwr Avg (RMS) All filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the square of the magnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This scale is best for measuring the true time average power of complex signals.
Page 386 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement action function, and when it is executed, all the Auto/Man controls for the current measurement are set to Auto, and all measurement settings coupled to the Auto/Man parameters are automatically set to their optimal values. For further details of measurement-specific settings (if any), see "Measurement- Specific Details"...
Page 387 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – Center Frequency Step – Resolution Bandwidth – Span/RBW Ratio – Sweep Time – Video BANDwidth VBW/RBW ratio – Upper and Lower Tone (set to Sense) – Zero span measurement Resolution Bandwidth –...
Page 388 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2.8.2 Limits Contains controls for the Limit Lines of the current measurement. Limits arrays can be user-entered, sent via SCPI, or loaded from a file. Dependencies Only appears if you have the proper option installed in your instrument Preset Limits are turned off by Preset, but the Limits arrays (data) are only reset (deleted) by Restore Mode Defaults.
Page 389 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Traces that are not updating (in View, for example) do not change color if the instrument X-axis settings (for example, Start Freq and Stop Freq) do not match those of the trace, for example if they have been changed since the trace stopped updating.
Page 390 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Margin lines are displayed in the same color as limit lines, but paler . If the limited trace is blanked then the limit line and the margin line are also blanked. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:MARGin <rel_ampl> Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:MARGin?
Page 391 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Edit Limit Lets you edit the content and the properties of the Limit Line. When entering the menu, the editor window (with the limit table) turns on, the selected Limit is turned On, and the amplitude scale is set to Log. The display of the trace to which the selected limit applies is turned on (thus, traces in Blank are set to View and traces in Background are set to On).
Page 392 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 2000 Insert Row Below Inserts a row below the current row. The new row is a copy of the current row and becomes the current row. The new row is not yet entered into the underlying table, and the data in the row is displayed in light gray.
Page 393 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:OFFSet:X <value> Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:OFFSet:X? <value> <freq> if Limit X-Axis Unit is Frequency <value> <time> if Limit X-Axis Unit is Time Example Set the X axis offset to –50 MHz: :CALC:LLIN:OFFS:X -50MHZ Apply the X axis offset to all points in the limit line, then reset the X axis offset to zero: :CALC:LLIN:OFFS:UPD Preset...
Page 394 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:OFFSet:UPDate Remote Command Example Set updates the limit table to reflect the X and Y offsets, then reset the offsets to zero: :CALC:LLIN:OFFS:UPD State Saved No state Delete Row This is an immediate action key. It immediately deletes the currently-selected row, whether or not that row is being edited.
Page 395 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement –1000 dBm 1000 dBm Limit Graph Lets you edit the limit line visually. Each node in the limit line is represented by a gray circle. The current node has a blue outline in the table and a blue circle in the graph.
Page 396 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Notes When the trace display is off, the trace is not tested. The trace is tested only when the trace display is on and "Test Limits" on page 401 Couplings This matters when testing a trace or limit line for failure, via :CALC:LLIN3:FAIL? :CALC:TRAC2:FAIL? Preset...
Page 397 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in NOTE the limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale, which may be linear or logarithmic.
Page 398 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency settings of the instrument. Pressing this button makes Center Frequency the active function. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative?
Page 399 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement limit line segment at RL – 20 dB, or –30 dBm. Furthermore, if the reference level amplitude changes to –30 dBm, the limit line segment is displayed at RL – 20 dB, or –50 dBm.
Page 400 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Copy from Limit Copies an existing limit into the specified limit, including all secondary parameters (Description, Associated Trace, Type, Margin, Interpolation, and Relative to CF/RL). The destination limit is specified as a subopcoded LLINe parameter and the source limit is specified as a numeric parameter.
Page 401 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Description Provides a description of up to 60 characters by which the operator can easily identify the limit. The value is stored in the exported file. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:DESCription “Description” Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:DESCription? :CALC:LLIN:DESC “European Emissions” Example Dependencies 60 characters max...
Page 402 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If the trace is at or within the bounds of all applicable limits, but outside the bounds of some applicable margin, the text “Trace x Fail Margin” is displayed in amber, where x is the trace number. A separate line is used for each reported trace. If the trace is outside the bounds of some applicable limits, the text “Trace x Fail”...
Page 403 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency | TIME Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain? :CALC:LLIN:CONT:DOM FREQ Example deletes all currently existing limit lines, then sets all limit lines to be specified in terms of frequency Couplings Affects all limit lines simultaneously, and resets all limit line data except the .wav file and email address stored in the Actions...
Page 404 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALC:LLIN3:DATA 1E9,-20,0,2E9,-20,1,2E9,-10,1,3E9,-10,1 Example describes a stair-stepped limit line Preset Limit line data is cleared by Restore Mode Defaults. However, it survives shutdown/restart of the instrument application (including power cycle) State Saved Saved in instrument state :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|…|6:DATA <x>,<ampl>,<connect>...
Page 405 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only) Queries the status of the current measurement limit testing. It returns a 0 if the measured results pass when compared with the current limits. It returns a 1 if the measured results fail any limit tests.
Page 406 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement An empty array returns not a number (9.91e+37 to a data query), 0 to a POINts query. :CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|…|6:CONTrol[:DATA] <x>, <x>, … Remote Command :CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|…|6:CONTrol[:DATA]? :CALC:LIM:CONT 1GHz,2GHz,2GHz,3GHz Example describes the X values of a stair-stepped limit line Preset Limit line data is cleared by Restore Mode Defaults State Saved...
Page 407 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|…|6:UPPer:POINts? Remote Command :CALC:LIM:UPP:POIN? Example returns the number of points in the upper limit line Preset Upper Limit line data/points is cleared by Restore Mode Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state :CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|…|6:LOWer[:DATA] <ampl>, …...
Page 408: Meas Standard
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|…|6:CLEar Remote Command :CALC:LIM2:CLE Example deletes all data for limit line 2 Couplings Identical to :CALC:LLIN:DEL Trace Fail (Remote Query Only) Tests a trace against all associated limit lines. Returns 0 if the trace is within all limits and margins, 1 if the trace exceeds either the limit or the margin.
Page 409 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement | SDMBSE | UWBINDOOR | LTEB1M4 | LTEB3M | LTEB5M | LTEB10M | LTEB15M | LTEB20M | WL11N20M | WL11N40M | WL11AC20M | WL11AC40M | WL11AC80M | WL11AC160M | WL11AX20M | WL11AX40M | WL11AX80M | WL11AX160M | WL11BE20M | WL11BE40M | WL11BE80M | WL11BE160M | WL11BE320M | WL11AD2G | WL11AY2G16 | WL11AY4G32 | WL11AY6G48 | WL11AY8G64 | NR5GFR1B100M [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard[:SELect]?
Page 410 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Swept CCDF Burst Spurious List Power Emission Sweep J-STD-008 IS-97D/98D NADC Bluetooth W-LAN 802.11a W-LAN 802.11b W-LAN 802.11g W-LAN 802.11n W-LAN 802.11ac W-LAN 802.11ax W-LAN 802.11be W-LAN 802.11ad W-LAN 802.11ay W-LAN HiperLAN/2 TETRA DVB-T L/SECAM/NICA...
Page 411 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement None Command Example :RAD:STAN NONE 2 MHz Span 3 MHz Auto rules Auto rules TETRA Command Example :RAD:STAN TETR 18 kHz Span 27 kHz 1.2 kHz Auto rules RRC Filter RRC Filter Alpha 0.35 FCC Part15 Subpart F Command Example...
Page 412 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement S-DMB System E Command Example :RAD:STAN SDMBSE 25 MHz Span 37.5 MHz 360 kHz Auto rules RRC Filter RRC Filter Alpha 0.22 Cellular Radio Standards The table below lists the CHP settings and provides an example for each cellular Radio Standard.
Page 413 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3GPP LTE 5 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN LTEB5M 5 MHz Span 7.5 MHz Auto rules Auto rules 3GPP LTE 10 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN LTEB10M 10 MHz Span 15 MHz Auto rules Auto rules 3GPP LTE 15 MHz Command Example...
Page 414 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement J-STD-008 Command Example :RAD:STAN JSTD 1.23 MHz Span 1.845 MHz 24 kHz Auto rules NADC Command Example :RAD:STAN NADC 32.8 kHz Span 49.2 kHz 1.2 kHz Auto rules Command Example :RAD:STAN PDC 21 kHz Span 31.5 kHz...
Page 415 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Wireless Radio Standards The table below lists the CHP settings and provides an example for each wireless Radio Standard. WLAN 802.11a Command Example :RAD:STAN WL802DOT11A 20 MHz Span 30 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11g Command Example...
Page 416 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement WLAN 802.11ac 40 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AC40M 40 MHz Span 60 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ac 80 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AC80M 80 MHz Span 120 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ac 160 MHz Command Example...
Page 417 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement WLAN 802.11be 20 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11BE20M 20 MHz Span 30 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11be 40 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11BE40M 40 MHz Span 60 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11be 80 MHz Command Example...
Page 418 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement WLAN 802.11ay 4.32 GHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AY4G32 4.32 GHz Span 6.48 GHz 1 MHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ay 6.48 GHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AY6G48 6.48 GHz Span 9.72 GHz 1 MHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ay 8.64 GHz Command Example...
Page 419 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :RAD:STAN HIPERLAN2 WLAN HiperLAN/2 Command Example UWB Indoor Command Example Bluetooth Command Example Packet Type (Bluetooth only) The command below sets the packet type for the Bluetooth measurement [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:PACKet DH1 | DH3 | DH5 Remote Command [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:PACKet?
Page 420 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 366 µs 1622 µs 2870 µs Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state DH1|DH3|DH5 Range Radio Standard Presets Hierarchy General None TETRA FCC Part 15 Subpart F APCO-25 dPMR Video DVB-T L/SECAM/NICAM G/PAL/NICAM I/PAL/NICAM S-DMB System E...
Page 421 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Cellular 3GPP 5G NR FR1 100 MHz FR1 100 MHz 3GPP LTE 1.4 MHz (6 RB) 3 MHz (15 RB) 5 MHz (25 RB) 10 MHz (50 RB) 15 MHz (75 RB) 20 MHz (100 RB) 1.4 MHz (6 RB) 3 MHz (15 RB)
Page 422 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Wireless W-LAN 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n 20 MHz 40 MHz 802.11ac 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 802.11ax 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 802.11be 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 320 MHz...
Page 423 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3. Compute the greater of the Reference and Offset A integration bandwidths. Divide that result by 100 and call it the ChannelWidthGoalRBW 4. Find the smallest integration bandwidth of any of the offsets; divide it by two and call the result IntegBWGoalRBW 5.
Page 424 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement EMC Standard Lets you select NONE (no EMI standard), CISPr (CISPR 16-1-1), or (MIL-461A). Each standard has a unique way of determining the couplings between detectors and RBWs, as well as its own set of available RBWs. Note that "Auto Couple"...
Page 425 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – "Controls in the CISPR Group" on page 425 – "Band Setup" on page 425 – "Sweep Points in Band E" on page 426 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CISPr:BAND A | B | C | CD | D | E Remote Command :FREQ:CISPR:BAND A...
Page 426 Certain behaviors in the X-Series instruments were changed from legacy HP/Agilent analyzers, in order to give you access to new, more powerful functionality. Keysight recognizes that from time to time, it is necessary to exactly match legacy behaviors, which is what the controls on this tab accomplish.
Page 427 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement control how the number of Max Hold traces taken; however, many users need a way of stopping and then resuming a Max/Min Hold without clearing the accumulated result. In the past you could stop and start Max Hold by going back and forth between Single and Continuous.
Page 428 State Saved Saved in State *RST *RST In older HP/Agilent/Keysight Spectrum Analyzers, sending (to preset the analyzer) puts the analyzer in Continuous sweep mode. To be compliant with the IEEE-488.2 specification, X-Series instruments put the instrument into Single sweep mode on *RST.
Page 429 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod AM | FM | PM | OFF Remote Command [:SENSe]:DEMod? Example Turn amplitude demodulation function ON: :DEM AM Dependencies When Tune & Listen is ON, all active traces are forced to use the same detector CISPR detectors (QPD, EMI Avg, RMS Avg) and Tune &...
Page 430 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 2 ms 100 s AM Channel BW Sets the RBW setting used by the hardware during the demodulation period in nonzero spans for the Tune & Listen function. Note that this is a separate parameter only for the demodulation function and does not affect the RBW setting in the BW menu which is used during the normal sweep.
Page 431 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement zero span, the previous setting of Channel BW and the flattop filter type are restored. [:SENSe]:DEMod:FM:BANDwidth:CHANnel <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:DEMod:FM:BANDwidth:CHANnel? :DEM:FM:BAND:CHAN 200 MHz Example Notes Grayed-out in Zero Span Dependencies Unavailable in Zero Span Couplings In Zero Span only, the value is set equal to the instrument’s current RBW value and it displays that value on the control, but the control is grayed-out...
Page 432: Advanced
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement FM Demod De-emphasis Controls a single-pole filter (6 dB/octave roll off) for the Tune & Listen function, usually to counter intentional pre-emphasis in the transmitter. When De-emphasis state is OFF, the hardware digital filter is bypassed, otherwise the setting is applied. The choices are Off, 25 µs, 50 µs, 75 µs, and 750 µs.
Page 433 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Range "Ranges" on page 437 below Annotation Found in the Meas Bar under PNO When not in Auto, label changes to #PNO Auto Function [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO[:STATe]?
Page 434 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement *Dependent on Option EP0 installation. See "Best Close-in" on page 434 below. The actual behavior varies somewhat depending on model number and option; for example, you always get Fast Tuning by choosing Option #3, but in some models, "Fast Tuning"...
Page 435 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Best Wide-offset :FREQ:SYNT 2 The LO phase noise is optimized for wider offsets from the carrier. Optimization is especially improved for offsets from 70 kHz to 300 kHz. Closer offsets are compromised and the throughput of measurements (especially remote measurements where the center frequency is changing rapidly), is reduced.
Page 436 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Auto Optimization Rules X-Series instruments have several grades of LO, offering different configurations when in the Auto Mode. The rules for Auto selection are as follows: Models with Option Conditions Selection Center frequency is < 699.9 kHz "Balanced"...
Page 437 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection All other conditions "Best Wide- offset" on page All Other Models Span > 12.34 MHz, or "Fast Tuning" on page 435 Note that in these models, the RBW >...
Page 438 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Option Option # Phase Noise Option Range EP2, EP3, EP5 Best Close-in [offset < 70 kHz] Best Wide-offset [offset > 100 kHz] Fast Tuning [medium loop bw] Best Close-in [offset < 90 kHz] Best Wide-offset [offset >...
Page 439 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement OFF|ON|HIGH Range [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer AUTO Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards The command: Compatibility [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer AUTO Notes is aliased to: [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer:AUTO[:STATe] ON Because of this, the [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer function cannot be a true Boolean, so the query, [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer? returns (not 1 or 0 like a true Boolean)
Page 440: If Gain
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :ADC:DITH:HIGH Example Medium (Log Accy) The Medium setting of ADC Dither (known as “On” in earlier versions of the instrument software) improves the linearity of low-level signals at the expense of some noise degradation. :ADC:DITH:ON Example Off (Best Noise)
Page 441 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement total input attenuation is 2 dB or less, the preamp is on, the start frequency is 10 MHz or more, and the stop frequency is 3.6 GHz or less and the FFT IF Gain is autocoupled, or manually set to Autorange, or manually set to High.
Page 442 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement best signal to noise ratio. You can specify the range for the best FFT speed, and optimize for noise or for large signals. When the sweep type is FFT and this function is in Autorange, the IF Gain is set initially for each chunk of data.
Page 443 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :IF:GAIN:FFT:AUTO ON Example Preset Auto Allows the instrument to pick the FFT IF Gain method as appropriate. When in Auto, the FFT IF Gain is set as follows: – When the Sweep Type Rules are set to “Best Speed,” the instrument selects Gain as the auto choice –...
Page 444 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Adaptive Option Support At present (Release: X-Apps 2024), support for Adaptive NFE is as follows: Mode Measurements Supports Adaptive NFE? ACP, IBEM, IBSP EDGEGSM EORF, ETSP, MON APD, DAN, FSC, MON, RTSC, SCH LTEAFDD LTEATDD ACP, CHP, MON, OBW, SEM, SPUR...
Page 445 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement When NFE is On or Full, the expected noise power of the instrument (derived from a factory calibration) is subtracted from the trace data. This will usually reduce the apparent noise level by about 10 dB in low band, and 8 dB in high band (>~3.6 GHz). NFE works with any RBW, VBW, detector, any setting of Average Type, any amount of trace averaging, and any signal type.
Page 446 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement case; and when lots of averaging is being performed, the signal displays more like the Full NFE case. Adaptive NFE is recommended for general-purpose use. For fully-ATE (automatic test equipment) applications, where possible distraction of the instrument user is not a risk, Full NFE is recommended.
Page 447 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Adaptive on, you must issue the commands in the proper order, as shown in the example above Preset Not affected by Mode Preset, but set to at startup and by Restore Mode Defaults State Saved Optimal Detector &...
Page 448 Recalibration of Noise Floor In instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated noise floor used by Noise Floor Extension should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year. To do this, use "Characterize Noise Floor"...
Page 449 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SOURce:NOISe:TYPE NORMal | SNS Remote Command :SOURce:NOISe:TYPE? :SOUR:NOIS:TYPE NORM Example Couplings If no SNS is connected, this parameter is set to NORMal NORMal When Type is set to and the SNS is disconnected, this parameter changes to When an SNS is not connected, the option is grayed-out (disabled) NORMal...
Page 450 Noise Figure Mode is installed. The SNS ENR data is issued in printed form when an SNS is purchased, or can be read using the instrument’s Noise Figure Mode if installed, or other Keysight noise figure instruments that support the SNS.
Page 451: Global
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement ACP Enhanced Dynamic Range On/Off Causes a 300 kHz SAW filter (also called the ACP Filter) to be switched into the signal path to allow third-order critical measurements, such as ACP measurements, to be made with improved dynamic range when the spectrum is substantially wider than 300 kHz.
Page 452 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement global settings use the Global Center Frequency, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Center Frequency remains unchanged. Adjusting the Center Frequency of any Mode that supports Global Settings, while Global Center Freq is ON, modifies the Global Center Freq.
Page 453 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :INST:COUP:EMC:STAN ALL Example :INST:COUP:EMC:STAN? Dependencies Only available if Option EMC is installed Preset Set to on Global Settings, Restore Defaults and System, Restore Defaults, All Modes ALL | NONE Range Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) When this control is set to ALL, the current Mode’s Limit Line is copied into the Global Limit Lines, and from there to all Modes that support Global settings and use Global Limit Lines, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Limit...
Page 454 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement This function resets to when "Restore Defaults" on page 2037 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed. :INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:BAND:EXTend 0 | 1 | ON | OFF Remote Command :INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:BAND:EXTend? :INST:COUP:FREQ:BAND:EXT 1 Example :INST:COUP:FREQ:BAND:EXT?
Page 455 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement CXA-m TG Uncalibrated Amplitude Range When using the CXA-m Tracking Generator, if the Source Frequency is in any of the frequency ranges in the table below, and the Source Amplitude is in the corresponding amplitude range of the below table, a warning status message is generated, +313 “Source Uncal”.
Page 456 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement State Saved Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is loaded and saved with state ON|OFF Range Annunciation The Source annotation in the Meas Bar shows Off if Source Mode is Off, “Trk, RF off” if Source Mode is Tracking but RF is off, and “Trk, RF on”...
Page 457 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement resulting delay from this adjustment is displayed on the Manual Track Delay control and may then be further adjusted by the user. This delay is most critical when the sweep rates are very high, over 108 Hz/s. The adjustment routine works best at these high sweep rates.
Page 458 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :INST:SOUR TRAC Example Dependencies Grayed-out if no Source is selected. In this case go to the Select Source menu to select, configure and/or verify your source Grayed-out and forced to Off if either BBIQ or External Mixing are selected Grayed-out in Measurements that do not support a source Tracking is grayed-out when Manual FFT is selected Tracking is grayed-out when the RF Preselector is on (in ...
Page 459 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement source connection fails after having been successfully acquired Note that even if this happens the current Source is not removed from the list of available sources 2. If the communication succeeds, the source goes to Remote. The instrument then commands the external source to save its current state in one of its own internal state registers (Seq 0, state 99) 3.
Page 460 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement dependencies are removed, allowing the measurement to return to its normal, non- tracking state. It also puts the Source in Local. Source Setup Table Accesses various setup parameters for the Source. In addition, the results of the source control sweep algorithms can be viewed.
Page 461 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Source Frequency = (Analyzer Frequency * Multiplier Numerator / Multiplier Denominator) + Offset Frequency Analyzer Start Analyzer Stop Multiplier Offset Freq Source Freq (Num/Den) (Hz) (Hz) Freq Freq (Hz) (Hz) 1.0e6 2.0e6 1.0e6 –...
Page 462 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement For X-Series software versions earlier than A.10.01, hardware triggering was NOTE unavailable in stepped tracking at frequencies above 3.6 GHz, so above 3.6 GHz, software triggering was always used. This is no longer the case. :SOURce:TRIGger:TYPE BUS | EXTernal[1] | EXTernal2 Remote Command :SOURce:TRIGger:TYPE?
Page 463 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Analyzer Trigger 1 Out: Triggers the external source to step to next point in the frequency step/list. Analyzer Trigger 1 In: Triggers the analyzer to make a measurement on this point Source Trigger In (or “Trig 1” at default setting for N5181B/82B, N5183B MXG or N5171B/72B, N5173B EXG): Triggers the source to step to the next point.
Page 464 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Notes: – Trigger sync connections are optional – synchronization can be done via remote commands if Bus Trigger is enabled in the Source Setup menu. – Connection from the SA external frequency reference output to the source frequency reference input (10 MHz Out to Ref In) is not required, but may improve the measurement accuracy.
Page 465 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement External trigger 1 input delay = Off External trigger 1 output type = Source Point Trigger External trigger 1 output polarity = Positive When this selection is made: – The External 1 selection in the Trigger menu (under the Trigger hardkey) does not appear and, if External 1 was previously selected, it changes to Free Run –...
Page 466 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Manual Track Delay Lets you manually adjust the delay of the tracking generator oscillator using the step keys, knob, or numeric keypad. The tracking delay should be tuned to maximize the amplitude of the trace. Generally, you should only need to perform this adjustment if the characteristics of your setup make it difficult for the instrument to accurately determine the correct delay with the Tracking Peak function (for example, your DUT may not be passing enough signal at the desired frequency for Tracking Peak to...
Page 467 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Dependencies If the currently selected source does not support this capability (for example, an internal Tracking Generator which must track the LO), this control is forced to its Preset value and grayed-out Preset Unaffected by Mode Preset, but set to by Restore Mode Defaults...
Page 468 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Set source start power to - 5 dBm and stop power + 5dBm (-5 + 10) :SOUR:POW:SWE:STAT ON Dependencies If the requested setting of Power Sweep causes the calculated external source start or stop Amplitude to exceed the external source capability, a warning status message is generated, “Data out of Range;...
Page 469 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet <rel_ampl> Remote Command :SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet? :SOUR:CORR:OFFS 5 Example Sets the displayed source offset power to 5 dB Dependencies If the requested setting of Amptd Offset causes the calculated external source start or stop Amplitude to exceed the external source capability, a warning status message is generated, “Data out of Range;...
Page 470 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SOUR:POW:STEP:AUTO ON Example Preset State Saved In Input/Output state Multiplier Numerator Offsets the source frequency from the instrument frequency. The source frequency tracks the SA frequency according to the source frequency equation shown at the bottom of the Source Setup Table.
Page 471 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Source Sweep Reverse Lets you reverse the source sweep direction Normally, the source will sweep from a lower frequency to a higher frequency. However, there are test scenarios in which the source sweep needs to be “reversed”. In this case, it sweeps from a higher frequency to a lower frequency.
Page 472 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Example Set the source frequency offset to 10 MHz: :SOUR:FREQ:OFFS 10MHz Dependencies If the currently selected source does not support this capability (for example, an internal Tracking Generator which must track the LO), this control is forced to its Preset value and grayed-out Preset Unaffected by Mode Preset, but set to 0.00Hz by Source Preset or Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved...
Page 473 “Delete Highlighted Source” to remove a source from the list of available sources. Note that only external sources that are supported by the Tracking Source Mode are displayed in the Available Source List. Here are the Keysight/Agilent sources currently supported:...
Page 474 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement information on how to install a USB source, see "Installing a USB source" on page Notes If no installed USB device is found which is a supported source, an error message is generated Installing a USB source USB is the only interface that requires no runtime action by the user in the Select Source menu, but does require “installation”...
Page 475 The LAN cannot be scanned directly from the instrument software, but if you want to discover sources on the LAN, you can open Keysight Connection Expert by pressing Run Connection Expert…. You can import the list of currently configured devices from Keysight Connection Expert by pressing Add From Connection Expert.
Page 476 The Keysight IO Libraries Suite provides a “Keysight VISA Help” document that has a section that shows the proper syntax for valid VISA address strings, in the ViOpen function definition.
Page 477 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SYST:COMM:SOUR:ADDR “USB0::12212::32145::US1234567A::INSTR” :SYST:COMM:SOUR:ADDR “GPIB1::19::INSTR” Notes Empty string is allowed and means no source is defined or selected The address string is the VISA address for external sources and INTERNAL for an internal source Dependencies Operation with a source requires a license.
Page 478 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement This connection to this source has been verified. If the verification fails, the text of the statement at the bottom changes to (in red): Verification of this source failed. Check the interface connection The selected source is also verified whenever it is acquired.
Page 479 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement starts up, a Source Preset is performed. In the Input/Output menu, Restore Input/Output Defaults will also perform a Source Preset. A Mode Preset, from modes that support the External Source, will turn the RF Off but will not perform a Source Preset.
Page 480 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Sweep Time Controls the time the instrument takes to sweep the current frequency span when is SWEpt, displays the sweep time in swept "Sweep Type" on page 491 measurements, and displays the equivalent sweep time when Sweep Type is FFT. In instruments without sweeping hardware, such as some modular instruments, NOTE this control may be labelled “Acquisition Time”...
Page 481 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If you need a longer total acquisition time than that represented by the Sweep Time readout in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A, use the "Minimum Acquisition Time" on page 483 control. Note that although some overhead time is required by the instrument to complete a sweep cycle, the sweep time reported when Sweep Type is SWEpt does not include...
Page 482 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SWE:TIME 500 ms Example :SWE:TIME? Notes The values shown in this table reflect the “swept spans” conditions, which are the default settings after a preset. See “Couplings” below for values in the zero-span domain :SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON Dependencies The Auto/Man toggle disappears in Zero Span.
Page 483 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement the Meas Uncal indicator is turned on for sweep times faster than 50 ms Zero span: 6000 s Swept spans: 4000 s In VXT: depends on current settings in Swept spans Annotation The sweep time is displayed in the lower-right corner of the screen.
Page 484 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SWE:ACQ:TIME 500 ms Example :SWE:ACQ:TIME? Dependencies Only available in certain modular instruments such as VXT Models M9410A/11A Grayed-out in Zero Span. Grayout error: “-121, Settings conflict; Zero Span, Min Acq Time unavailable” Preset Auto State Saved...
Page 485 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Notes continuous measurement, but never restarted a measurement and never reset a sweep X-Series B-models have a Cont/Single toggle control instead of Single and Cont hardkeys, but it is still true that, if in single measurement, the Cont/Single toggle control never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep More Information Continuous...
Page 486 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If the instrument is in Single sweep, and not Averaging/Holding, and you want to take one more sweep, press Restart. If the instrument is in Single sweep, and Averaging/Holding, and you want to take one more sweep without resetting the Average trace or count, go to Meas Setup and increment the average count by 1 by pressing the Step-Up key while Average/Hold :CALC:AVER:TCON...
Page 487 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Sweep Time Annotation is an Auto/Man control. In Auto (the default state), Normal is chosen unless when unless there is a band crossing or software preselection is being performed, in which case Estimated is chosen. The Sweep Time command and query set and return the traditional values;...
Page 488 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :SWE:TZO:TIME 500 ms Example Dependencies Only appears if the Zoomed Trace window is present Preset 10% of Sweep Time State Saved Saved in instrument state 10% of minimum Sweep Time Maximum Sweep Time Annotation The zoom sweep time is displayed in the lower-right corner of the bottom window.
Page 489 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Restart Restarts the current sweep, or measurement, or set of averaged/held sweeps or measurements. If you are Paused, pressing Restart performs a Resume. The front-panel key Restart performs exactly the same function. The Restart function is accessed in several ways: –...
Page 490 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If the instrument is in the process of aligning when a Restart is executed, the alignment finishes before the restart function is performed. Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on).
Page 491 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Event Trace Effect Min Hold pressed (even if already in Min Hold) Set to maxtracevalue Trace Average pressed (even if already in Trace Trace data unaffected but start new Average) sweep/avg/hold Restart pressed Trace data unaffected but start new sweep/avg/hold Parameter requiring restart changed (e.g., RBW)
Page 492 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement FFT sweeps are never auto-selected when Screen Video, Log Video or Linear Video are the selected Analog Output. Value SCPI Notes Auto AUTO When in Auto, the selection of sweep type is governed by two different sets of rules, depending on whether you want to optimize for dynamic range or for speed.
Page 493 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The indication of (FFT) includes a # to indicate manual selection, as: Sweep (#FFT) ~13 ms (1001 points) Backwards Two additional parameters, AUTO and SWP, are supported for backwards compatibility only and Compatibility should not be used for new designs Notes...
Page 494 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe]? :SWE:TYPE:AUTO:RUL:AUTO ON Example :SWE:TYPE:AUTO:RUL:AUTO? Couplings Pressing "Auto Couple" on page 2017 always sets Sweep Type Rules to Auto Preset In determining the Swept or FFT setting, the auto rules use the following approach: –...
Page 495 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Backwards :SWEep:TIME:AUTO:MODE SANalyzer is aliased to :SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes Compatibility NORMal Notes :SWEep:TIME:AUTO:MODE SRESponse is aliased to :SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes SRESponse The query is aliased to :SWEep:TIME:RULes?, so it matches for SRESponse but not for SANalyzer The old Auto Sweep Time command was the same: [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes NORMal | ACCuracy so, it still works although it now has a third parameter (SRESponse)
Page 496 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement measurements will not fully agree with swept measurements except at extremely slow sweep rates (note that the meters in the N6141A are zero span measurements and therefore this statement also applies to the meters). Because of the faster sweep times and still low errors, SA-Normal is the preferred setting of Sweep Time Rules.
Page 497 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement optimal FFT Width based on the current setup; but on occasion you may wish to limit FFT Width to be narrower than that which the instrument would have set. This function does not let you widen FFT Width beyond that which the NOTE instrument might have set;...
Page 498 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:WIDTh:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:WIDTh:AUTO? :SWE:FFT:WIDT:AUTO ON Example :SWE:FFT:WIDT:AUTO? Couplings Pressing "Auto Couple" on page 2017 always sets FFT Width to Auto Preset More Information An FFT measurement can only be performed over a limited span known as the “FFT segment”.
Page 499 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Further improvement in dynamic range is possible by changing the FFT IF Gain (in the Meas Setup menu of many measurements). If the segments are reduced in width, FFT IF Gain can be set to High, improving dynamic range. Depending on what IF Bandwidth option you have specified, there can be up to three different IF paths available in FFT sweeps, as seen in the diagram below: The 10 MHz path is always used for Swept sweeps.
Page 500 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement speed. Decreasing the number of points does not decrease the sweep time, but it may speed up the measurement, depending on the other sweep settings (for example, in FFT sweeps). Fewer points will always speed up the I/O. Due to minimum sweep rate limitations of the hardware, the minimum sweep time available to the user will increase above its normal value of 1 ms as the number of sweep points increases above 15001.
Page 501 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The resolution of setting the sweep time depends on the number of points selected Preset 1001 State Saved Saved in instrument state Normally the minimum is 1, but in TrackingSource Mode, the minimum value of Points is 101. If you go into TrackingSource Mode with fewer points than 101, it sets Points to 101 20001 all measurements unless noted below 100,001 when not in Tracking Source Mode...
Page 502 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The one-bucket trace is a special case. The one-bucket trace extends from start to stop and is drawn from start to stop as shown below. Note that the black dots at the bucket ends are not actually drawn, but are for illustrative purposes only.
Page 503 IF Dithering Lets you turn IF Dithering on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to enhance the rejection of images and internally-generated spurious signals. [:SENSe]:SWEep:IF:DITHer OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 504 Image Protection Lets you turn IF Protection on and off. IF Protection is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to detect and suppress images and spurs that may be present in non-preselected hardware. IF Protection takes two sweeps and by correlating the data between them, provides a single, correct power-versus-frequency trace.
Page 505 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Image rejection requires two measurements, one with low-side mixing and the other with high-side mixing. Internally, it uses two power-versus-frequency arrays to produce a single, correct power-versus-frequency display. This single result is created as the minimum of the two measurement arrays using the minimum value at each index point (that is, frequency bin).
Page 506 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If the instrument is set for Continuous measurement, it sets up the measurement and initiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition (sweep) taken once the trigger condition is met. If the instrument is set for Single measurement, it remains in the "idle"...
Page 507 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Invalid Data Indicator The invalid data indicator is displayed whenever the data on the display does not match the settings of the instrument. The most common example of this is when instrument settings have changed in the time since the data in the traces on the display was taken.
Page 508 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement If you now tap or click on one of the items in this menu, it performs the corresponding function. Peak Search finds the highest peak on the selected Trace (see "Peak Search" on page 320).
Page 509 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Peak Search works as above. Peak Search all Traces finds the highest peak in the Waterfall window (see "Peak Search All Traces" on page 321). Add Marker Here takes the lowest-numbered marker that is currently Off and turns it on as a Normal marker in the Waterfall window at the point where you right-clicked (or touched- and-held).
Page 510 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement On the top line each trace number is shown, in the trace color. A blue box is drawn around the currently selected trace. Below each trace number, is a letter signifying the trace type for that trace number, where Clear/Write Trace Average...
Page 511 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Trace 4 Blanked, not updating, data was taken with Averaging turned on, Sample detector manually selected Trace 5 Visible, not updating, data was taken in Min Hold with Negative Peak detector auto selected Trace 6 Blanked, not updating, in Clear/Write, with Normal detector manually selected...
Page 512 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – In Image Suppress mode, when you select a trace it becomes the active trace, and the formerly active trace goes into View – When you turn on Image Suppress, Update turns off for all traces except the selected trace For the ACP measurement, when Meas Method is RBW, FAST or FPOWer, Select Trace is disabled...
Page 513 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement selecting Clear/Write while Clear/Write is already selected will nonetheless clear the trace and begin rewriting it. Besides the Trace Type, the "View/Blank" on page 1740 state must be set to Active (Update: ON, Display: ON) for a trace to be updating and visible. Selecting any Trace Type automatically makes the trace Active.
Page 514 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement old Trace Modes are selected using :TRAC:MODE, whose parameters are mapped into calls to :TRACe:TYPE, :TRACe:UPDate and :TRACe:DISPlay, and the old global Averaging command [:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe] is provided for backwards compatibility. See the individual command descriptions for details. When Average/Hold in the Meas Setup, Legacy Compatibility menu is ON, the following is true for traces in Max Hold and Min Hold: –...
Page 515 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement In X-Series, unlike earlier instruments, Max Hold and Min Hold now obey the Average Number and counts up to a terminal value as Average always has As the Average/Hold Number now affects Min Hold and Max Hold, the operations that restart Averaging (for example, the Restart key) now also restart Min Hold and Max Hold As a result of these changes, legacy code that restarts averaging while retaining a running Max Hold will need to be rewritten, because the Max Hold will now restart when the Average does...
Page 516 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement count. Therefore, when Clear/Write is pressed for one trace, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold must restart for all traces. When in Clear/Write, if a measurement-related instrument setting is changed (that is, one which requires new data to be taken, like Center Frequency or Attenuation), a new sweep is initiated but the trace is not cleared.
Page 517 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement When in Max Hold, if a measurement-related instrument setting is changed(that is, one which requires new data to be taken, like Center Frequency or Attenuation), the Max Hold sequence restarts and a new sweep is initiated but the trace is not cleared.
Page 518 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement – Clear/Write: Clear and Write – Trace Average: Restart Averaging – Max Hold: Restart Max Hold – Min Hold: Restart Min Hold View/Blank Lets you set the state of the two trace variables: Update and Display. The choices available in this dropdown menu are: Active Update and Display both...
Page 519 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Trace Update State On/Off Remote For Swept SA Measurement (in SA Mode): Command :TRACe[1]|2|…|6:UPDate[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :TRACe[1]|2|…|6:UPDate[:STATe]? For all other measurements: :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:UPDate[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:UPDate[:STATe]? where <meas>...
Page 520 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 1|0|0 for Trace 1; for 2 &3 State Saved Saved in instrument state More Information :SENSe When a trace becomes inactive, any update from the system (detectors) immediately stops, without waiting for the end of the sweep. The trace data remains unchanged, but stops updating.
Page 521 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :TRACe[:<meas>]:CLEar:ALL Remote Command :TRAC:CLE:ALL Example Dependencies When Signal ID is on, this key is grayed-out 3.2.10.3 Detector Lets you choose and configure detectors for the selected trace. Detector Selects a specific detector for the current measurement. The detector selected is then applied to the selected trace.
Page 522 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement :DET:TRAC AVER Example Sets trace 1’s detector to average :DET:TRAC1 AVER Sets trace 1’s detector to average :DET:TRAC2 SAMP Sets trace 2’s detector to sample Notes The query returns a name that corresponds to the detector type as shown below, and indicates the setting for Trace 1: String Returned Definition...
Page 523 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement CISPR detector becomes active, the EMC Standard is set to CISPR If the Avg Type is in Auto, and any of the CISPR detectors is selected on any active trace, the Voltage Averaging type is auto-selected Preset Preset returns all traces to “auto”, which will result in Normal (Rosenfell) detection for all traces...
Page 524 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] NORMal | AVERage | POSitive | SAMPle | NEGative Backwards | QPEak | EAVerage | EPOSitive | MPOSitive | RMS Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]? Backwards In ESA and E7400, selecting QPD or EMI Average sets the Amplitude Scale Type to Linear and performs Compatibility an auto-ranging function resulting in the Reference Level being adjusted such that the highest level of Notes...
Page 525 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Value SCPI Notes CISPR pulse response standards. It displays the average value of the amplitude envelope, rather than the average value of sample-detected amplitude, and uses an advanced algorithm to realize a lowpass filter that conforms to the latest CISPR 16-1- 1standard RAVerage EMI –...
Page 526 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement correct relative location on screen. The odd buckets are similar. – The Average Detector result depends on the Average Type. To explicitly set the averaging method, use the Meas Setup, Average Type key. –...
Page 527 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement instruments are capable of making Quasi Peak and EMI Average detected measurements correctly on a log scale, due to the digital IF. This latter capability means that the user can observe detected EMI levels on a log scale, allowing a large visible dynamic range.
Page 528 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Multiple Detectors The instrument always provides the requested detector on the specified trace. Depending on the detectors requested the instrument can provide up to three different detectors simultaneously within the constraints of its digital processing algorithms.
Page 529 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The query returns the Auto state of Trace 1 [:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Backwards Compatibility [:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO? SCPI Detector Auto All Traces Returns the selected set of detectors to the “preset” state, which is auto-selected. Dependencies When Signal ID is on, this control is grayed-out Couplings...
Page 530 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Math Function Trace Math functions perform mathematical operations between traces and, in some cases, user-specified offsets. When in a Trace Math function, the indicated function is performed during the sweep with the math function used in place of a detector.
Page 531 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Turns off trace math for trace 1 Notes The Trace Math Function command has 6 main set of parameters: - Set 1 defines the “result trace”: TRACE1|…|TRACE6 -Set 2 defines the “function”: PDIFference|PSUM|LOFFset|LDIFference|OFF - Set 3 is a “trace operand”...
Page 532 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Trace Math Options To generate a trace math result, you must take a sweep . The trace math engine, IMPORTANT described below, operates in concert with the sweep engine in the instrument. Until a sweep has been taken, even if the constituent traces are not in Update mode, no result is generated.
Page 533 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement DestinationTrace = 10 log(10(1/10)(FirstTrace) + 10(1/10)(SecondTrace)) The values of the trace points are assumed to be in a decibel scale, as they are internally stored. If a point in either trace operand is equal to maxtracevalue, the resultant point is also maxtracevalue.
Page 534 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The values of the operand trace points are assumed to be in decibel units (as they are internally stored) and the reference is in dBm so the result is in dBm. Example: If the first operand trace 1 is at 5 dBm, the second operand trace 2 is at –5 dBm, and the reference is –25 dBm, then the destination trace will be –15 dBm.
Page 535 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 536 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 537 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 538 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement From Trace Selects the trace to be copied to or exchanged with the "To Trace" on page 1752 when a "Copy" on page 1752 "Exchange" on page 1753 is performed Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace"...
Page 539 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Exchange Executes a Trace Exchange based on the "From Trace" on page 1752 "To Trace" on page 1752 parameters. The From Trace and To Trace values are exchanged with each other. The action is performed once. The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace.
Page 540 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement 3.2.10.6 Normalize Lets you configure and execute functions to display one trace relative to a reference trace. Normalize On/Off Switches Normalize on or off. When ON, on each sweep, the normalized trace (Trace 3) is subtracted from Trace 1 and the result is added to the normalized reference level.
Page 541 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement More Information Normalize is most useful for applying correction data to a trace while making a stimulus-response measurement with a tracking generator (or synchronized source). For example, connect the cables and a through line, in place of the device to be measured, between the tracking generator and the instrument input.
Page 542 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement You are also given the ability to define what (dB) value to use for Ref Level, and to define where on the screen the Ref Lvl line will appear using Normalized Reference Position.
Page 543 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement Store Reference (Trace1 -> Trace3) Copies trace 1 into trace 3. Store Ref (1→ 3) must be pressed before pressing Normalize (On). Note that this puts Trace 3 in Update=OFF (not updating) and Display=ON (visible).
Page 544 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max –/+327.6 dB Norm Ref Position Sets the graticule line that represents the Norm Ref Lvl. 10 is the top line and 0 is the bottom line. The normalized reference position is indicated with a white right arrow on the left side of the display and a white left arrow on the right side of the display, just inside the graticule.
Page 545 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement calibration. When the Continue button is pressed, the Open calibration sweep is taken and stored in internal memory, for use later in this cal process. If the Cancel button is pressed, the Open/Short Cal is cancelled and the Normalize menu is returned.
Page 546 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement On completion of the Short Calibration, the Open and Short calibration measurements are averaged (power). The picture with prompt is taken off the screen and a menu with “Store Cal” and “Exit Without Storing Cal” is displayed. When you press “Store Cal”...
Page 547 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.2 Swept SA Measurement The Open Short calibration is applied by taking the average of the Open and the Short trace. The average is a linear average point-by-point. You can further configure averaging on the traces (Open, Short, and final measurement). In this case, the value of the averaged Open and Short trace are linear averaged (by performing a point-by-point average of the two traces).
Page 548 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3 Channel Power Measurement This measurement is used to find the total power present in a specified bandwidth. Power Spectral Density (signal power normalized to 1 Hz) is also reported. When in WLAN Mode, or when WLAN radio standard is selected in SA Mode, the peak Power Spectral Density for 1 MHz is reported.
Page 549 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Backwards Compatibility Queries Query Return Value :FETCh:CHPower:CHPower? Returns the Channel Power (dBm) :MEASure:CHPower:CHPower? :READ:CHPower:CHPower? :FETCh:CHPower:DENSity? Returns the Power Spectral Density (dBm/Hz) :MEASure:CHPower:DENSity? :READ:CHPower:DENSity? The results returned by the queries depend on the currently-selected Mode and the value of (where required).
Page 550 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Results Returned Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth PSD (Power The power in the specified unit bandwidth. The unit bandwidth is Spectral selected by "PSD Unit"...
Page 551 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD Mode Measurement Results Results Returned 1 or not Returns scalar results: specified Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth PSD (Power The power in the specified unit bandwidth. The unit bandwidth is Spectral selected by "PSD Unit"...
Page 552 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 5G NR Mode Measurement Results Results Returned 1 or not Returns scalar results: specified Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth PSD (Power The power in the specified unit bandwidth. The unit bandwidth is Spectral selected by "PSD Unit"...
Page 553 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement WLAN Channel Power Measurement Results Results Returned 1 or not Returns scalar results: specified When the radio standard is not 802.11ac 80 + 80 MHz or 802.11ax 80 + 80 MHz: Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth Peak PSD (Power Spectral Density) The peak PSD over the integration bandwidth.
Page 554 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Results Returned Returns floating point numbers that are the captured trace data of the power (in dBm/resolution BW) of the signal for Trace 2. The frequency span of the captured trace data is specified by Span Returns floating point numbers that are the captured trace data of the power (in dBm/resolution BW) of the signal for Trace 3.
Page 555 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.1.2 Carrier Info Windows: "Graph" on page 555, "Metrics" on page 556 Dual window view: Channel Power graph and Carrier Info table. :DISP:CHP:VIEW CINF Example Dependencies Only available in MSR, LTE-A FDD/TDD and 5G NR Modes 3.3.2 Windows This section describes the windows that are available in the Channel Power measurement:...
Page 556 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Spectrum View with Bar Graph On This is the same as the Spectrum view, but has a blue bar between the markers that indicates the measured output power level. The bar graph is activated when the “Bar Graph”...
Page 557 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Measure Trace See: "Measure Trace" on page 1754. Power Results Total carrier power, total PSD and total format carrier power are displayed in the lower window. Total format carrier power is total power of carriers of the same Radio Format.
Page 558 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Integ Bw) multiplied by the number of carriers with carrier measure state setting to yes. RF-BW Displays the total bandwidth from the lowest carrier to the highest carrier, whether their measurement states are on or off. Carrier Power This is the power in all the currently defined carriers.
Page 559 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement This is the total power of all the carriers with carrier measure state setting to On. The power is calculated by integrating across the bandwidth declared by the Carrier Integ Bw parameter for each carrier and then totaling the sums. The total integration bandwidth is shown as part of the result.
Page 560 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Parameter Set Displays which format parameter set is selected. 3.3.2.3 Gate Window #3 Turning on Gate View displays the Gate Window, which allows you to see your gating signal at the same time as the measured data. See the description under "Gate View On/Off"...
Page 561 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :DISPlay:CHPower:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> Remote Command :DISPlay:CHPower:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm Example :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV? Couplings When "Auto Scaling" on page 568 (default), this value is automatically determined by the measurement result. When you set a value manually, Auto Scaling changes to Attenuation is not coupled to Ref Value Preset 10.00 dBm...
Page 562 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Scale Range Sets the Y-Axis scale range. Remote Command Replace <meas> with the identifier for the current measurement :DISPlay:<meas>:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe <rel_ampl> :DISPlay:<meas>:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe? :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RANG 100 Example :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RANG? Couplings Coupled to Scale/Div as follows Scale Range = Scale/Div * 10 (number of divisions) When you change this value, Auto Scaling automatically changes to Preset 100 dB...
Page 563 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Notes The Y axis unit has either logarithmic or linear characteristics. The set of units that is logarithmic consists of dBm, dBmV, dBmA, dBmV, dBmA, dBmV/m, dBmA/m, dBpT, and dBG. The set of units that are linear consists of V, W, and A.
Page 564 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Unit Example Notes :UNIT:POW dB relative to one milliwatt dBmV :UNIT:POW dB relative to one millivolt DBMV dBmA :UNIT:POW dB relative to one milliamp DBMA :UNIT:POW W Watts :UNIT:POW V Volts :UNIT:POW A Amperes dBmV :UNIT:POW...
Page 565 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Unit Example Notes dBuA as a Transducer Unit is used when using current probes, because current probes are often supplied with conversion tables that provide the transducer factors. When dBuA is used as a Transducer Unit, the normal conversion from power to amps for dBuA (based on the instrument input impedance) is not done, but instead the conversion is based solely on the Correction that contains the transducer factors.
Page 566 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement The units of current (A, dBmA, dBuA) are calculated based on 50 Ω input NOTE impedance. Transducer Unit Transducer Units (formerly called Antenna Units) are units of field strength rather than amplitude, and are used when correcting the response of device such as antennas whose amplitude characteristics are measured in units of field strength.
Page 567 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement If a Transducer Unit is set, it is displayed as Xducer Unit in the Y Axis Unit NOTE dropdown. However, you can only change the Transducer Unit via the Edit Correction dialog in the Input/Output, Corrections menu. In that dialog, tap Settings then Transducer Unit.
Page 568 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Auto Function :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet:STATe? :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS:STAT ON Example Turns Ref Level Offset On Preset Ref Position Positions the reference level at the top, center, or bottom of the Y Scale display. Changing the reference position does not change the reference level value.
Page 569 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 570 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 571 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Full Range Atten This control and Attenuator Summary only appear in N9041B, when the RF input is selected, the RF Input Port is set to RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed.
Page 572 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Mech Atten Labeled Mech Atten in Dual-Attenuator models, and Atten in Single-Attenuator models. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, this control only affects the mechanical attenuator. Lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This value is normally auto-coupled to Ref Level, "Internal Preamp"...
Page 573 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 7.5 GHz to above 7.5 GHz, the attenuation setting changes to a multiple of 10 dB that is no smaller than the previous setting. For example, 4 dB attenuation changes to 10 dB Preset Auto The Auto value is 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB...
Page 574 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described under "Attenuation" on page 1954, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available in the X-Series, the Single Attenuator and Dual-Attenuator configurations. In Dual-Attenuator configurations, we have mechanical attenuation and electronic attenuation, and current total attenuation is the sum of electronic + mechanical attenuation.
Page 575 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement This control includes an Enable/Disable toggle switch; it is only possible to enter a value for the Electronic Attenuator when this switch is in the Enable position. For more details of the Electronic Attenuator, see "More Information"...
Page 576 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Transition Rules" on page 577 Preset 0 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB Dual-Attenuator configuration: 24 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB. So, if the EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly;...
Page 577 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to a state that has no Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the Mechanical Attenuator. Note that the information below only applies to the Dual- Attenuator configurations, and only when the Electronic Attenuator is installed: When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state: –...
Page 578 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing the alignment of the instrument dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel as well as remote use.
Page 579 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – Electric attenuator only – Combination of Electric attenuator and Mechanical attenuator when [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate is executed. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE EONLy | COMBined Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE? :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE EONL Example :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE? Dependencies Does not appear in the Swept SA, RTSA, Monitor Spectrum and Complex Spectrum measurements Appears in the Waveform measurement in BASIC and 5G NR Modes COMBined Preset...
Page 580 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :POW:RANG:OPT:ATT? Notes The parameter option ELECtrical sets this function to in Single-Attenuator models The parameter option COMBined is mapped to ELECtrical in Single-Attenuator models. If you send COMBined, it sets the function to and returns ELEC to a query...
Page 581 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1963 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 579 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 582 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 583 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 579 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 584 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]? :POW:ATT:STEP 2 Example :POW:ATT:STEP? Notes Has a toggle control on the front panel, but takes a specific value (in dB) when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10 Dependencies Blanked in EXA, CXA and CXA-m if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present.
Page 585 Example Dependencies Only appears in the Swept SA and RTSA measurements NORM Preset 3.3.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 586 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC. For signals with high peak-to- average ratios, the range may need to exceed the rms signal power by a significant amount to avoid clipping.
Page 587 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation OFF | ON | ELECtrical | Remote Command COMBined [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes Because there is no attenuator control available in these models, the control displays only choices. However, for SCPI compatibility with other platforms, all three parameters (ELECtrical, COMBined, and ON) are honored and all are mapped to ELECtrical, so if any of these three parameters is sent, a subsequent query will return ELEC...
Page 588 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :POW:RANG:PAR 12 dB Example Notes In some Modes, this parameter is read-only; meaning the value will appear on the control and query via SCPI, but is not changeable. In such applications the control is grayed-out. Attempts to change the value via SCPI are ignored, but no error message is generated Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode...
Page 589 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement In general, only appears in instruments whose hardware supports this signal routing. For example, this tab does not appear in many of the modular instrument products, including VXT Model M9420A, or UXM. This tab does appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E, because "Software Preselection"...
Page 590 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement centering is completed The offset applied to do the centering appears in "Preselector Adjust" on page 1979 Status Bits/OPC When centering the preselector, *OPC does not return true until the process is complete and a dependencies subsequent measurement has completed, nor are results returned in response to :READ...
Page 591 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :POW:PADJ? Notes The value on the control is displayed to 0.1 MHz resolution – Does not appear in CXA-m Dependencies – Does not appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A – Does not appear in M9410E/11E/15E/16E –...
Page 592 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement for a preamp with a 9 kHz lowest specified frequency: "Preamp: Accy unspec’d below 9 kHz". Selection Example Note :POW:GAIN OFF Low Band :POW:GAIN ON Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band :POW:GAIN:BAND preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band...
Page 593 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement says “3.6 GHz”. If it is a 13.6 GHz preamp and it is set to Full Range the annotation says “13.6 GHz” When the USB Preamp is connected to USB, the Preamp annotation says “Preamp: USB” if the internal preamp is off or “Preamp: USB, Int”...
Page 594 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement More Information When LNA is installed, the preamp annotation changes to show the state of both LNA and Internal Preamp. Below is an example: Note that when operating entirely in the low band (below about 3.6 GHz), if LNA is on, Internal Preamp is switched off (even if you have its switch set to ON).
Page 595 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does Low Noise Path Enable, but the preamp’s compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of Low Noise Path Enable.
Page 596 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement In any of these cases, if the required options are not present and the SCPI command is sent, error - 241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are grayed-out if the current measurement does not support them Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are not supported in Avionics and MMR Modes (non- modulation measurements).
Page 597 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement This allows the function to automatically switch based on certain Auto Rules as shown below: VMA Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Digital Demod Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in which case choose Preselector Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Presel Bypass...
Page 598 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in Analysis which case choose Full Bypass if conditions warrant(FBP Option is available and “Allow Full Bypass in Auto”...
Page 599 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Low Noise Path Enable Low Noise Path Enable provides a lower noise floor under some circumstances, particularly when operating in the 21–26.5 GHz region. With the Low Noise Path enabled, the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp are bypassed whenever all the following are true: –...
Page 600 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement range of the preamp path is too little and the noise floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range The graph below illustrates the concept. It shows, in red, the performance of an instrument at different attenuation settings, both with the preamp on and off, in a measurement that is affected by both instrument noise and instrument TOI.
Page 601 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement µW Preselector Bypass Toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the normal path for the instrument.
Page 602 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement interface. Also, if the preamp is turned on, the Low Noise Path is not used, whether or not the Full Bypass Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Full Bypass Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (>...
Page 603 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Preselector and Bandwidth Conflict When the Frequency Extender Preselector is applied and the signal bandwidth is greater than 2.5 [GHz], then a settings alert message will show to warn the user that the signal may be distorted due to the limitation of the Frequency Extender Preselector bandwidth.
Page 604 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement N9042B+V3050A Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector. Since the microwave preselector only goes up to 50 GHz, software preselection must be used to suppress and separate images above 50 GHz. The specific algorithm used for software preselection is specified by the SW Preselection Type selection –...
Page 605 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Preset N9041B N9042B+V3050A M9410A/11A State Saved Saved in instrument state SW Preselection Type Specifies the algorithm used for software preselection. Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N.
Page 606 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement SW Preselection BW Specifies the effective bandwidth to be used for Software Preselection. The options are: – NORMal – when making Swept measurements, a software preselection algorithm is used which takes up to 4 background acquisitions, then post-processes the result.
Page 607 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement and 6000 MHz. The Prefilter provides the necessary rejection of the unwanted signal. [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe]? Example Enable High Freq Prefilter for the Complex Spectrum Measurement in BASIC Mode: :SPEC:PFIL ON...
Page 608 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.4 BW Opens the Bandwidth (BW) menu, which contains controls for the Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth functions of the instrument. The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types, Gaussian and Flattop.
Page 609 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement When Res BW is set to Auto, the resolution bandwidth is auto-coupled to the span. The ratio of Span/RBW is approximately 106:1 when auto coupled. When Res BW is set to Man, and the bandwidths are entered manually, these bandwidths are used regardless of other instrument settings Preset "RBW Presets"...
Page 610 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement In some PowerSuite measurements, in the LTE-Advanced (both FDD and TDD) and 5G NR modes, when Res BW is in Auto, the resolution bandwidth is predefined based on the corresponding bandwidth of the single carrier, as shown in the table below.
Page 611 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Video BW Lets you change the instrument post-detection filter (VBW or “Video Bandwidth”) from 1 Hz to 8 MHz in approximately 10% steps. In addition, a wide-open video filter bandwidth may be chosen by selecting 50 MHz. The VBW is annotated at the bottom of the display, in the center.
Page 612 RBW Filter Type Selects the type for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in HP/Agilent/Keysight spectrum instruments were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart.
Page 613 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement –3 dB (Normal) filter BW Res BW 300 Hz –6 dB filter BW Res BW (–6 dB) 422 Hz Noise filter BW Res BW (Noise) 317 Hz Impulse filter BW Res BW (Impulse) 444 Hz CISPR filter BW Res BW (CISPR) 200 Hz MIL filter BW...
Page 614 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off. :DISPlay:GRATicule[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:GRATicule[:STATe]?
Page 615 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Trace Annotation on/off is supported.
Page 616 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement The frequency annotations in any other associated display, such as in Active Function, Softkey label, Limit Editor, Amp Corr Editor and Marker Table are not changed. Frequency annotations that are not associated with the spectrum, such as RBW, IBW, Sweep Time, are excluded and they are shown regardless of this selection.
Page 617 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement *RST nor :SYSTem:PRESet enable the display) – and you are in remote operation, the display can be turned back on by pressing the Local or Esc keys, or by sending :SYSTem:DEFaults MISC :DISPlay:ENABle ON (neither *RST...
Page 618 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement View "Views" on page 554. User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect <alphanumeric>...
Page 619 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement be able to return easily to your original Basic View, you can save your edited View as a “User View”. Save Layout as New View Saves your new View as a User View. An alpha keyboard appears, which lets you name your new View;...
Page 620 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement rename a Predefined View” is generated If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; View SCPI cannot be used while Display is disabled” is generated Delete User View You can delete the current View if it is a User View.
Page 621 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement View Listing Query Returns a string containing a comma-separated list of names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:CATalog? Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:CAT? Example Notes Returns a quoted string of the available Views for the current measurement, separated by commas. The list includes names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement Example: "Normal,Trace Zoom,Spectrogram,Baseband,myView1,yourView1"...
Page 622 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.6.1 Settings Contains controls that pertain to the X axis parameters of the measurement. These parameters control how data on the vertical (X) axis is displayed and control instrument settings that affect the horizontal axis. Center Frequency Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule.
Page 623 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Return the current value of Center Frequency: :FREQ:CENT? Notes Sets the RF, External Mixing or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input: – For RF input, equivalent to :FREQ:RF:CENT – For I/Q input, equivalent to :FREQ:IQ:CENT –...
Page 624 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset Preset above) 526 (CXA) 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 526 (MXE) 1.805 GHz 3.6 GHz 27.0 GHz 16.005 GHz 32.0 GHz 32.5 GHz 20.005 GHz...
Page 625 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Tracking Min Freq If above this Freq, Stop Freq Max Freq (clips to this freq when turn (can't tune Generator clipped to this Freq when TG TG on and can’t tune below above) Option turned on...
Page 626 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “-221, Settings conflict” warning Preset See table above State Saved Saved in instrument state -79.999995 MHz 26.999999995 GHz "Center Frequency Presets"...
Page 627 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement The minimum frequency in the currently selected mixer band + 5 Hz If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on Span The maximum frequency in the currently selected mixer band – 5 Hz If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on Span I/Q Center Freq Sets the Center Frequency to use when the I/Q input is selected, even if the I/Q...
Page 628 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :CHP:FREQ:SPAN? Dependencies If the electrical attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Span such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz results in an error In instruments with an RF Preselector, such as MXE, you cannot sweep across the band break at 3.6 GHz while the RF Preselector is on in Continuous sweep, as there is a mechanical switch which bypasses the RF Preselector above 3.6 GHz.
Page 629 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:AUTO? :CHP:FREQ:SPAN:AUTO OFF Example :CHP:FREQ:SPAN:AUTO? Notes The span value is adjusted when the relevant carrier parameters such as bandwidth, integration bandwidth, number of component carriers etc., are changed, whatever the span state (Auto or Man) When in Man state, if the input value is less than the required sum of total integration bandwidths and gaps of the multi-carriers, the required span value is set Dependencies...
Page 630 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Freq Option Max Span (can't set higher than this) 5.75 GHz (VXT models M9410A/11A) F06 & EP6 6.27 GHz (VXT models M9410A/11A) F06 & LFE & EP6 6.5999935 GHz (VXT models M9411A) M9415A-F06 6.27 GHz M9415A-F08...
Page 631 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement CF Step Changes the step size for Center Frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is active, the UP|DOWN step keys (and the parameters for Center Frequency from remote commands) change the center frequency by the step-size value.
Page 632 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement frequency, center frequency, start frequency, stop frequency, and all other absolute frequency settings in the instrument, including frequency count. When a frequency offset is entered, the value appears below the center of the graticule. To eliminate an offset, perform a Mode Preset, or set the frequency offset to 0 Hz.
Page 633 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement when saving a State+Trace file because the data and state are saved together. Full Span (Remote Command Only) Changes the span to show the full frequency range of the instrument. It maximizes the span within a range not changing the center frequency.
Page 634 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.7.2 Settings The controls on this tab include the Marker active function and a radio button selection of the marker control mode (Normal, Delta, or Off) for the selected marker, as well as additional functions that help you use markers. Marker Frequency Sets the marker X Axis value in the current marker X Axis Scale unit.
Page 635 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement returned as a real number, not an integer, corresponding to the translation from X-Axis Scale units to trace points . When a marker is turned on, it is placed at the center of the screen on the trace. Therefore, the default value depends on instrument condition.
Page 636 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state POSition|DELTa|OFF Range Annotation Mkr # <X value> and <Marker value> upper right on graph When Marker Trace is Polar in WCDMA mode: Mkr # <Chip Value (RHO & QPSKEVM)/Symbol Value (CDP)>, <X value> and <Y value> upper right on graph Backwards Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker.
Page 637 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab let you move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with "Marker Delta" on page 637.
Page 638 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement The control is duplicated here to allow you to conveniently perform a peak search and change the marker’s control mode to Delta without having to access two separate menus. 3.3.7.4 Properties The controls on this tab are used to set certain properties of the selected marker. Marker Frequency This is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace.
Page 639 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Marker Trace Selects the trace on which you want your marker placed. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X-Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
Page 640 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Avg/Hold Number Specifies the number of measurement averages used to calculate the measurement result. The average is displayed at the end of each sweep. After the specified number of average counts, the averaging mode (terminal control) setting determines the averaging action.
Page 641 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – EXPonential: The measurement averaging continues using the specified number of averages to compute each exponentially-weighted averaged value. The average is displayed at the end of each sweep – REPeat: The measurement resets the average counter each time the specified number of averages is reached [:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol EXPonential | REPeat Remote...
Page 642 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Mode Radio Std Integ BW WLAN 802.11a/g(OFDM/DSSS-OFDM) 20 MHz 802.11b 25 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be (20MHz) 20 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be (40MHz) 40 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be (80MHz) 80 MHz 802.11ax/be (80 MHz + 80 MHz) 80 MHz 802.11ac/ax/be (160 MHz) 160 MHz 802.11be (160 MHz + 160MHz)
Page 643 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:CHPower:IF:GAIN[:STATe]? :CHP:IF:GAIN ON Example :CHP:IF:GAIN? Notes = high gain = low gain Dependencies The IF Gain controls (FFT IF Gain and Swept IF Gain) have no effect when the U7227A USB Preamp- lifier is connected.
Page 644 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement This is to alert you that measurement accuracy might be negatively impacted. [:SENSe]:CHPower:SAVoid[:STATe] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CHPower:SAVoid[:STATe]? :CHP:SAV ON Example :CHP:SAV? Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A/15A Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 645 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement while in Zero Span. Nonetheless, if Auto Couple were executed while in Zero Span, it would set RBW to Auto "behind the scenes" so that, on exit from Zero Span, it would be in Auto.
Page 646 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – Resolution Bandwidth – Fundamental Frequency – Dwell Time – Range Table Resolution Bandwidths – Range Table Dwell Times Meas Preset Restores all measurement parameters to their default values. :CONFigure:CHPower Remote Command :CONF:CHP Example 3.3.8.2 Meas Method...
Page 647 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement RRC Filter Alpha Inputs the alpha value for the Root Raised Cosine (RRC) filter. [:SENSe]:CHPower:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa <real> Remote Command [:SENSe]:CHPower:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa? :CHP:FILT:ALPH 0.5 Example :CHP:FILT:ALPH? Notes This parameter is normally used when TETRA is selected as the Radio Std Preset 0.22 State Saved...
Page 648 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.8.3 Meas Standard Contains controls that allow you to preset the PowerSuite measurements to conform to various communications standards. Radio Standard Presets Lets you specify the Radio Standard to be used. Spectrum Analyzer Mode supports many Radio Standards.
Page 649 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Chart for Standard and Available Measurements Note that not every measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode is available for every standard. The chart below describes which measurements are available for each Radio Standard. For TOI or Harmonics measurements, no Radio Standards are available.
Page 650 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Swept CCDF Burst Spurious List Power Emission Sweep FCC Part 15 Subpart F DVBT-T G/PAL/NICAM DVB-T I/PAL/NICAM S-DMB System UWB Indoor General Radio Standards The table below lists the settings and provides an example for each general Radio Standard.
Page 651 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement DVB-T L/SECAM/NICAM Command Example :RAD:STAN DVBTLSN 7.61 MHz Span 24 MHz 3.9 kHz Auto rules Sweep Points 8001 DVB-T G/PAL/NICAM Command Example :RAD:STAN DVBTGPN 7.61 MHz Span 24 MHz 3.9 kHz Auto rules Sweep Points 8001 DVB-T I/PAL/NICAM...
Page 652 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3GPP W-CDMA Command Example :RAD:STAN W3GPP 5 MHz Span 7.5 MHz 240 kHz Auto rules RRC Filter RRC Filter Alpha 0.22 3GPP LTE 1.4 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN LTEB1M4 1.4 MHz Span 2.1 MHz Auto rules Auto rules...
Page 653 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3GPP LTE 20 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN LTEB20M 20 MHz Span 30 MHz Auto rules Auto rules cdma2000 Command Example :RAD:STAN C20001X :RAD:STAN C2000MC1 :RAD:STAN? (Query always returns C20001X) 1.23 MHz Span 1.845 MHz 24 kHz Auto rules...
Page 654 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement IS97D Query always returns 1.23 MHz Span 1.845 MHz 24kHz Auto rules Band Class (IS-97D/98D only) The following function is only available when you have selected the standard: IS- 97D/98D. It lets you select the band class. [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:BAND:CLASs BC0 | BC1 Remote Command...
Page 655 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement WLAN 802.11n 20 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11N20M 20 MHz Span 30 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11n 40 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11N40M 40 MHz Span 60 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ac 20 MHz Command Example...
Page 656 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement WLAN 802.11ax 40 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AX40M 40 MHz Span 60 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ax 80 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AX80M 80 MHz Span 120 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ax 160 MHz Command Example...
Page 657 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement WLAN 802.11be 320 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11BE320M 320 MHz Span 480 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ad 2 GHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AD2G 2.16 GHz Span 3.24 GHz 1 MHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ay 2.16 GHz Command Example...
Page 658 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :RAD:STAN HIPERLAN2 WLAN HiperLAN/2 Command Example UWB Indoor Command Example Bluetooth Command Example Packet Type (Bluetooth only) The command below sets the packet type for the Bluetooth measurement [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:PACKet DH1 | DH3 | DH5 Remote Command [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:PACKet?
Page 659 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 1622 µs 2870 µs Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state DH1|DH3|DH5 Range Radio Standard Presets Hierarchy General None TETRA FCC Part 15 Subpart F APCO-25 dPMR Video DVB-T L/SECAM/NICAM G/PAL/NICAM I/PAL/NICAM S-DMB System E Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 660 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Cellular 3GPP 5G NR FR1 100 MHz FR1 100 MHz 3GPP LTE 1.4 MHz (6 RB) 3 MHz (15 RB) 5 MHz (25 RB) 10 MHz (50 RB) 15 MHz (75 RB) 20 MHz (100 RB) 1.4 MHz (6 RB) 3 MHz (15 RB)
Page 661 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Wireless W-LAN 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n 20 MHz 40 MHz 802.11ac 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 802.11ax 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 802.11be 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 320 MHz...
Page 662 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3. Compute the greater of the Reference and Offset A integration bandwidths. Divide that result by 100 and call it the ChannelWidthGoalRBW 4. Find the smallest integration bandwidth of any of the offsets; divide it by two and call the result IntegBWGoalRBW 5.
Page 663 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement When DVB-T radio standard is selected in SA Mode, this functionality is disabled, and the input signal is instead compared against a pre-defined spectrum mask. In LTE-A FDD/TDD and 5G NR Modes, this feature is not supported. In MSR Mode, this feature is not supported, because the power of each carrier may be different.
Page 664 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Preset WLAN Mode: All other Modes: State Saved OFF|ON Range PSD Limit Power Spectral Density Limit. If PSD Limit state is ON, PSD Limit is a threshold to determine whether the real measured PSD will pass or not.
Page 665 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :CALCulate:CHPower:LIMit:PSDensity:STATe? Command :CALC:CHP:LIM:POW:STAT ON Example :CALC:CHP:LIM:POW:STAT? Preset WLAN Mode: All other Modes: State Saved OFF|ON Range Power Limit Fail (Remote Query Only) Queries whether a power test passes or fails. When DVB-T radio standard is selected in SA Mode, the result of this query has no meaning.
Page 666 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Phase Noise Optimization Lets you select the LO (local oscillator) phase noise behavior for various operating conditions. When in Auto, selects the LO (local oscillator) phase noise behavior to optimize dynamic range and speed for various instrument operating conditions. For full details, see "Parameter Options, Installed Options &...
Page 667 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Option Description – In instruments without EP0 optimizes phase noise for small frequency offsets from the carrier "Best Wide- Optimizes phase noise for wide frequency offsets from the carrier offset" on page "Fast Tuning"...
Page 668 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement code compatibility across the family. Parameter 4 selects "Best Close-in" on page 667, which is usually not as good a choice as "Balanced" on page 668. Balanced :FREQ:SYNT 1 In instruments with EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase noise at offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier whenever there are no significant spurs within the span observed with an on-screen carrier.
Page 669 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement In this mode, the LO behavior compromises phase noise at many offsets from the carrier in order to allow rapid measurement throughput when changing the center frequency or span. The term "Fast Tuning" on page 668 refers to the time it takes to move the local oscillator to the start frequency and begin a sweep;...
Page 670 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection loop local oscillator, which switches to Source Mode is set to “Tracking” a single loop for fast tuning Center frequency is < 195 kHz, or "Best Close-in" (available in PXA) on page 667 CF >= 1 MHz and Span <= 1.3 MHz...
Page 671 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – The RBW to be used in the calculations is the equivalent –3 dB bandwidth of the current RBW filter – The rules apply whether in swept spans, zero span, or FFT spans Ranges Option Option #...
Page 672 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement improvement for those instrument settings that can make good use of the potential improvement, such as settings that provide more averaging. The result is that when not much averaging is being performed, the signal displays more like the NFE-off case;...
Page 673 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor? :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Example Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, does not appear, but the SCPI command will be accepted without error but has no effect Couplings When NFE is enabled in any mode manually, a prompt will be displayed reminding you to perform the...
Page 674 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement In the simplest case, the measured power (signal plus instrument noise) in each display point (bucket) is compensated by subtracting the estimated noise power, leaving just the signal power. This is the operation when the detector is Average, and the Average Type is set to Power.
Page 675: Global Center Freq
On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extensions should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year.
Page 676: Global Emc Std
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement When Mode Preset is pressed while Global Center Freq is ON, the Global Center Freq is preset to the preset Center Frequency of the current Mode. This function resets to when "Restore Defaults" on page 2037 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed.
Page 677: Global Limit Lines (Freq And Amptd)
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) When this control is set to ALL, the current Mode’s Limit Line is copied into the Global Limit Lines, and from there to all Modes that support Global settings and use Global Limit Lines, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Limit Lines remain unchanged.
Page 678: Restore Defaults
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Preset Set to by Global Settings > Restore Defaults and System > Restore Defaults > All Modes ON|OFF Range Restore Defaults Resets all functions in the Global settings menu to OFF. Pressing System, Restore Defaults, All Modes has the same effect.
Page 679 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement The Meas Uncal (measurement uncalibrated) warning is displayed in the Status NOTE Bar at the bottom of the screen when the manual Sweep time entered is faster than the time computed by the instrument’s Sweep time equations, that is, the Auto Sweep Time.
Page 680 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Other than non-sweeping hardware: Typically, 1 ms Non-sweeping hardware: N/A In the ACP measurement, when Meas Method is Fast Power, the minimum sweep time is span- dependent and automatically calculated Other than non-sweeping hardware: 4000 s Non-sweeping hardware: N/A...
Page 681 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement If increased, the instrument acquires signal for the specified time duration for each chunk. It performs additional FFTs, and averages or peak-holds the FFT results for a chunk, depending on Detector settings. Note that the actual acquisition time for each chunk may exceed the Minimum Acquisition Time value, in order to satisfy FFT time required by other parameters, and to perform an integer number of FFTs.
Page 682 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :INITiate:CONTinuous? Example Put instrument into Single measurement operation: :INIT:CONT 0 :INIT:CONT OFF Put instrument into Continuous measurement operation: :INIT:CONT 1 :INIT:CONT ON Preset :SYST:PRES :INIT:CONT to ON, but *RST :INIT:CONT Note that sets sets State Saved...
Page 683: Restart
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement If the instrument is in Single measurement mode, pressing the Cont/Single toggle control does not zero the count and does not cause the sweep to be reset; the only action is to put the instrument into Continuous measurement operation. If the instrument is already in Continuous sweep: –...
Page 684 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :INITiate[:IMMediate] Remote Command :INITiate:RESTart :INIT:IMM Example :INIT:REST Notes :INIT:REST :INIT:IMM perform exactly the same function Couplings Resets average/hold count k. For the first sweep overwrites all active (update = on) traces with new current data.
Page 685 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement If there is no Average or Max/Min Hold function (no trace in Trace Average or Hold, or Average/Hold Num set to 1), and no Waterfall window is being displayed, a single sweep is equivalent to a single measurement. A single sweep is taken after the trigger condition is met;...
Page 686: Pause/Resume
3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Averaging The weighting factor used for averaging is k. This is also the average/hold count for how many valid sweeps (data acquisitions) have been done. This is used for comparisons with N, as those comparisons always needs to be based on valid completed sweeps.
Page 687 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Notes :INIT:CONT is ON, then a new continuous measurement will start immediately, with sweep (data acquisition) occurring once the trigger condition has been met :INIT:CONT is OFF, then :INIT:IMM is used to start a single measurement, with sweep (data acquisition) occurring once the trigger condition has been met :ABORt Dependencies...
Page 688 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement instrument amplitude accuracy specifications only apply when Auto Sweep Time is set to ACCuracy. Additional amplitude errors that occur when Auto Sweep Time is set to NORMal usually well under 0.1 dB, though this is not guaranteed. Because of the faster sweep times and still low errors, NORMal is the preferred setting of Auto Sweep...
Page 689 IF Dithering Lets you turn IF Dithering on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to enhance the rejection of images and internally-generated spurious signals. [:SENSe]:SWEep:IF:DITHer OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 690 Image Protection Lets you turn IF Protection on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to detect and suppress images and spurs that may be present in non-preselected hardware. IF Protection takes two sweeps and by correlating the data between them, provides a single, correct power-versus-frequency trace.
Page 691 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 3.3.10.2 Trace Control The controls on this tab allow you to set the "Trace Type" on page 1927 and its update mode. There are four Trace Types: – Clear/Write – Trace Average –...
Page 692 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :TRACe[1]|2|…|6:TYPE WRITe | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold Command :TRACe[1]|2|…|6:TYPE? For all other measurements: :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:TYPE WRITe | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:TYPE? where <meas> is the identifier for the current measurement :TRAC:TYPE WRIT Example :TRAC:TYPE?
Page 693 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – They ignore the Average/Hold number; Single for Max Hold causes one sweep only, so switching to Single stops after the current sweep, and switching to Cont starts again without clearing the accumulated result –...
Page 694 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – Pressing Max Hold while already in Max Hold (or doing so remotely) had no effect. Now it will clear the trace and restart the sweep and the Max Hold sequence – Changing the vertical scale (Log/Lin or dB/div) of the display restarted Max Hold and Min Hold. This is no longer the case Preset State Saved...
Page 695 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Trace Average The instrument maintains and displays an average trace, which represents the cumulative average on a point-by-point basis of the new trace data and previous averaged trace data. Pressing Trace Average (for the selected trace), or sending :TRAC:TYPE AVER (for the specified trace), sets the trace type to Trace Average, clears the trace, initiates a...
Page 696 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – The average/hold count k is set to 1, so that the next time the max hold trace is displayed it simply represents one trace of new data – A new sweep is initiated. Remember that restarting Max Hold also restarts averaging and Min Hold, as there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 697 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement View/Blank Lets you set the state of the two trace variables: Update and Display. The choices available in this dropdown menu are: Active Update and Display both View Update OFF; Display Blank Update OFF;...
Page 698 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:UPDate[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:UPDate[:STATe]? where <meas> is the identifier for the current measurement Example Make trace 2 inactive (stop updating): :TRAC2:UPD 0 Couplings Whenever you set Update to for any trace, the Display is set to for that trace Preset...
Page 699 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement More Information When a trace becomes inactive, any update from the :SENSe system (detectors) immediately stops, without waiting for the end of the sweep. The trace data remains unchanged, but stops updating. If the trace is blanked, this still does not affect the data in the trace.
Page 700 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement :CALCulate:MATH <trace_num>, PDIFference | PSUM | LOFFset | LDIFference | OFF, <trace_num>, <trace_num>, <real>,<real> :CALCulate:MATH? <trace_num> where <trace_num> is any one of: TRACE1|…|TRACE6 For all other measurements: :CALCulate:<meas>:MATH <trace_num>, PDIFference | PSUM | LOFFset | LDIFference | OFF, <trace_num>, <trace_num>, <real>,<real>...
Page 701 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement - Set 5 defines the “Log Offset” (in dB) - Set 6 defines the “Log Difference Reference” (in dBm) Note that the trace math mode is an enumeration; that is, when a math function is set for a trace, it turns off any math function that is on for that trace, then sets the new math function The parameters sent in the command are reflected in the values in the control menu.
Page 702 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – Trace data being sent in from the remote interface – A copy or exchange of trace data You should try to avoid these occurrences during a sweep, as they will tend to invalidate the math result being accumulated.
Page 703 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operand, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace. DestinationTrace = FirstTrace + Offset The values of the trace points are assumed to be in dBm (as they are internally stored) and the offset is in dB.
Page 704 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement If neither of the above is true for a given point, then: – If that point in SecondTrace is equal to maxtracevalue, the resultant point is mintracevalue. – If that point in SecondTrace is equal to mintracevalue, the resultant point is maxtracevalue.
Page 705 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 706 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 707 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 708 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Option Parameter Detector Behavior functions, average type, and the trace averaging function This option is set using "Detector Select Auto/Man" on page 709 NORMal Normal The detector determines the peak of the CW-like signals, and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise-like signals.
Page 709 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement – POSitive (peak) with MAXHold – NEGative (peak) with MINHold AVERage Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state NORMal|AVERage|POSitive|SAMPle|NEGative|RMS Range Detector Select Auto/Man Sets the Detector mode to Auto or Manual. In Auto, the proper detector is chosen based on rules that take into account the measurement settings and other instrument settings.
Page 710 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace" on page 1752 when a "Copy" on page 1752 "Exchange" on page 1753 is performed Preset Copy Executes a Trace Copy based on the "From Trace"...
Page 711 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace. Remote For Swept SA Measurement (in SA Mode): Command :TRACe:EXCHange TRACE1 | … | TRACE6, TRACE1 | … | TRACE6 For all other measurements: :TRACe:<meas>:EXCHange TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3, TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 <meas>...
Page 712 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.3 Channel Power Measurement Measure Trace Specifies which trace’s scalar results are displayed in the Metrics window, and :READ :FETCh retrieved by sending a query: – Trace 1 – Trace 2 – Trace 3 :CALCulate:<meas>:MTRace TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 Remote Command :CALCulate:<meas>:MTRace? <meas>...
Page 713 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement This measurement computes and displays the bandwidth occupied by a given percentage of the total mean power of a signal. Measurement Commands The general functionality of "CONFigure" on page 2753, "INITiate"...
Page 714 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Command Return Value :FETCh:OBWidth:FERRor? Returns the Transmit Frequency Error (Hz) :MEASure:OBWidth:FERRor? :READ:OBWidth:FERRor? :FETCh:OBWidth:XDB? Returns the xdB Bandwidth (Hz) :MEASure:OBWidth:XDB? :READ:OBWidth:XDB? Remote Command Results The following table describes the results returned by the FETCh, MEASure, and READ queries listed above, according to the index value n.
Page 715 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Results Returned Item Unit, if x dB Reference Power x dB Reference Power Frequency - offset frequency x dB Reference Power Frequency – absolute frequency (9.91E+37) (9.91E+37) (9.91E+37) Lower OBW boundary - offset frequency Lower OBW boundary - absolute frequency Lower OBW boundary - absolute power Lower OBW boundary - relative power...
Page 716 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Name SCPI Name SCPI # "Gate" on page 717 "Gate View On/Off" on page 2686 These are multiple-window views. When in a multiple-window view, you select a window by touching it. The menu controls may sometimes change depending on which window is selected.
Page 717 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.1.2 OBW Boundaries Windows: "Graph" on page 717, "Metrics - OBW Boundaries" on page 720 The spectrum trace is displayed in the upper window. The lower window of OBW Results view is replaced by the OBW boundaries table in this view. Occupied bandwidth and X dB bandwidth for both lower and upper boundaries are displayed.
Page 718 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement For LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD mode only 3.4.2.2 Metrics - OBW Results Window #2 Displays the textual results of the Occupied BW measurement. View Size Position "OBW Results" on page 716 Two fifth, full width Bottom Gate One third, full width...
Page 719 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement For the LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR modes, the metric result is shown as below: Occupied Bandwidth The occupied bandwidth result is f – f where f and f are the lower and upper carrier boundary point.
Page 720 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement This is the setting parameter. See "% of OBW Power" on page 800 x dB This is the setting parameter. See "x dB" on page 801. Active Carriers In the LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR modes, the number of active carriers is displayed to show how many carriers are identified as active in auto detected mode of span, otherwise “-”...
Page 721 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement The x dB reference power result shows the power of the highest signal point within the OBW Span. x dB At Freq The x dB reference power frequency result shows the frequency of the highest signal point within the OBW Span.
Page 722 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.3 Amplitude Activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference Value as the active function, depending on the measurement. Some features in this menu apply to multiple measurements. Some other features apply only to specific measurements and their controls are blanked or grayed-out in measurements that do not support the feature.
Page 723 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Scale/Div also determines the displayed amplitude range in the log plot graph. Since there are usually 10 vertical graticule division on the display, the total amplitude range of the graph is typically 10x this amount. For example, if Scale/Div is 10 dB, then the total range of the graph is 100 dB.
Page 724 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Y Axis Unit Displays a dropdown menu that enables you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude unit. This setting affects how the data is read over the remote interface. When using the remote interface, only numerical values are returned, so you must know what the Y Axis Unit is to interpret the results.
Page 725 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Unit Example Notes :UNIT:POW DBM Y Axis Unit is set to dBm dBmV :UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBmV DBMV dBmA :UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBmA DBMA :UNIT:POW W Y Axis Unit is set to W :UNIT:POW V...
Page 726 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Unit Example Notes dBmV/m :UNIT:POW Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmV/meter. DBUVM This selection is only available if a Correction is turned on, and the Transducer Unit (Transducer for that Correction is not None Unit)
Page 727 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – Display Scale (Log) – Y Axis Unit, dBm – Scale/Div, 1 dB – Ref Level, 10 dBm This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely as 5.
Page 728 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Example: If the Transducer Unit in the Correction is dBmV/m, then the selection in the dropdown looks like this: And on the control it looks like this: If a Transducer Unit is set, it is displayed as Xducer Unit in the Y Axis Unit NOTE dropdown.
Page 729 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Ref Level Offset Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. The reference level is the absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display. The on/off (AUTO) switch turns Ref Level Offset on or off. Setting a value for Ref Level Offset turns AUTOOFF.
Page 730 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Reference Position :DISPlay:OBWidth:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition Backwards Compatibility SCPI Auto Scaling Toggles Auto Scaling On or Off. :DISPlay:OBWidth:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle 0 | 1 | OFF | ON Remote Command :DISPlay:OBWidth:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle? :DISP:OBW:WIND:TRAC:Y:COUP OFF Example :DISP:OBW:WIND:TRAC:Y:COUP? Couplings When Auto Scaling is ON, and the Restart front-panel key is pressed, this function automatically sets the scale per division to 10 dB and determines the reference values based on the measurement results When you change a value of "Scale/Div"...
Page 731 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 732 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation tab, which (in most Modes) opens the Attenuation menu. If the first control in the Attenuation menu says Mech Atten you have the Dual-Attenuator configuration. If the first control says Atten you have the Single-Attenuator configuration.
Page 733 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB Only valid values are 0, 6, 14, 20 dB Annotation When the Input is RF, and the Input Port is RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed: On the Meas Bar, the field “Atten”...
Page 734 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement In either case, if the attenuator was in Auto, it is set to Manual Dependencies Some measurements do not support Auto setting of Mech Atten. In these measurements, the Auto/Man selection is not available, and the Auto/Man toggle function is not available In Dual-Attenuator configurations, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, the mechanical attenuator has no auto setting, and the Auto/Man toggle function is not available.
Page 735 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Annotation The current value for Total Atten is displayed in the Measurement Bar at the top of the display. A value appears for Electronic Attenuation only if the Electronic Attenuator is enabled. The annotation appears Atten: <total> dB (e<elec>) The e letter is in amber in Single-Attenuator configurations For example:...
Page 736 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Note that in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator, this switch is only shown when the Electronic Attenuator is disabled. In other measurements, Mech Atten has no Auto/Man function. In these measurements, no switch is shown on the Mech Atten control: Mech Atten also appears with no switch, as above, in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator but when the Electronic Attenuator is enabled.
Page 737 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement control and the Meas Bar The electronic attenuator, and the “soft” attenuation function provided in Single-Attenuator config- urations, are unavailable above the low band (0-3.6 GHz, 0-3.4 GHz, 0-3 GHz, depending on the model). If the low band range is from 0-3.6 GHz, and Stop Frequency of the instrument is > 3.6 GHz, then the Enabled/Disabled section of the Elec Atten control will be and grayed-out "Internal Preamp"...
Page 738 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :POW:EATT:STAT? Preset (Disabled) for Swept SA measurement (Enabled) for all other measurements that support the electronic attenuator The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band can change based on the NOTE selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it).
Page 739 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation Examples in the Dual-Attenuator configuration: –...
Page 740 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI, and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known.
Page 741 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping If this function is ON, it applies the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1963 each time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous measurement mode, it only executes before the first measurement. In Dual-Attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both attenuators participate in the autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the mechanical attenuator does not participate in the autoranging.
Page 742 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Range Dual-Attenuator models: Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten Single-Attenuator models: Off | On Backwards Compatibility Command Notes aliases to "Elec Atten Only" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT ELEC) aliases to "Off" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT OFF) :POW:RANG:AUTO?
Page 743 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1963 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 741 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 744 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 745 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 741 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 746 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]? :POW:ATT:STEP 2 Example :POW:ATT:STEP? Notes Has a toggle control on the front panel, but takes a specific value (in dB) when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10 Dependencies Blanked in EXA, CXA and CXA-m if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present.
Page 747 Example Dependencies Only appears in the Swept SA and RTSA measurements NORM Preset 3.4.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 748 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC. For signals with high peak-to- average ratios, the range may need to exceed the rms signal power by a significant amount to avoid clipping.
Page 749 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation OFF | ON | ELECtrical | Remote Command COMBined [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes Because there is no attenuator control available in these models, the control displays only choices. However, for SCPI compatibility with other platforms, all three parameters (ELECtrical, COMBined, and ON) are honored and all are mapped to ELECtrical, so if any of these three parameters is sent, a subsequent query will return ELEC...
Page 750 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :POW:RANG:PAR 12 dB Example Notes In some Modes, this parameter is read-only; meaning the value will appear on the control and query via SCPI, but is not changeable. In such applications the control is grayed-out. Attempts to change the value via SCPI are ignored, but no error message is generated Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode...
Page 751 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement In general, only appears in instruments whose hardware supports this signal routing. For example, this tab does not appear in many of the modular instrument products, including VXT Model M9420A, or UXM. This tab does appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E, because "Software Preselection"...
Page 752 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement centering is completed The offset applied to do the centering appears in "Preselector Adjust" on page 1979 Status Bits/OPC When centering the preselector, *OPC does not return true until the process is complete and a dependencies subsequent measurement has completed, nor are results returned in response to :READ...
Page 753 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :POW:PADJ? Notes The value on the control is displayed to 0.1 MHz resolution – Does not appear in CXA-m Dependencies – Does not appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A – Does not appear in M9410E/11E/15E/16E –...
Page 754 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement for a preamp with a 9 kHz lowest specified frequency: "Preamp: Accy unspec’d below 9 kHz". Selection Example Note :POW:GAIN OFF Low Band :POW:GAIN ON Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band :POW:GAIN:BAND preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band...
Page 755 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement says “3.6 GHz”. If it is a 13.6 GHz preamp and it is set to Full Range the annotation says “13.6 GHz” When the USB Preamp is connected to USB, the Preamp annotation says “Preamp: USB” if the internal preamp is off or “Preamp: USB, Int”...
Page 756 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement More Information When LNA is installed, the preamp annotation changes to show the state of both LNA and Internal Preamp. Below is an example: Note that when operating entirely in the low band (below about 3.6 GHz), if LNA is on, Internal Preamp is switched off (even if you have its switch set to ON).
Page 757 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does Low Noise Path Enable, but the preamp’s compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of Low Noise Path Enable.
Page 758 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement In any of these cases, if the required options are not present and the SCPI command is sent, error - 241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are grayed-out if the current measurement does not support them Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are not supported in Avionics and MMR Modes (non- modulation measurements).
Page 759 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement This allows the function to automatically switch based on certain Auto Rules as shown below: VMA Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Digital Demod Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in which case choose Preselector Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Presel Bypass...
Page 760 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in Analysis which case choose Full Bypass if conditions warrant(FBP Option is available and “Allow Full Bypass in Auto”...
Page 761 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Low Noise Path Enable Low Noise Path Enable provides a lower noise floor under some circumstances, particularly when operating in the 21–26.5 GHz region. With the Low Noise Path enabled, the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp are bypassed whenever all the following are true: –...
Page 762 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement range of the preamp path is too little and the noise floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range The graph below illustrates the concept. It shows, in red, the performance of an instrument at different attenuation settings, both with the preamp on and off, in a measurement that is affected by both instrument noise and instrument TOI.
Page 763 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement µW Preselector Bypass Toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the normal path for the instrument.
Page 764 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement interface. Also, if the preamp is turned on, the Low Noise Path is not used, whether or not the Full Bypass Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Full Bypass Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (>...
Page 765 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Preselector and Bandwidth Conflict When the Frequency Extender Preselector is applied and the signal bandwidth is greater than 2.5 [GHz], then a settings alert message will show to warn the user that the signal may be distorted due to the limitation of the Frequency Extender Preselector bandwidth.
Page 766 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement N9042B+V3050A Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector. Since the microwave preselector only goes up to 50 GHz, software preselection must be used to suppress and separate images above 50 GHz. The specific algorithm used for software preselection is specified by the SW Preselection Type selection –...
Page 767 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Preset N9041B N9042B+V3050A M9410A/11A State Saved Saved in instrument state SW Preselection Type Specifies the algorithm used for software preselection. Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N.
Page 768 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement SW Preselection BW Specifies the effective bandwidth to be used for Software Preselection. The options are: – NORMal – when making Swept measurements, a software preselection algorithm is used which takes up to 4 background acquisitions, then post-processes the result.
Page 769 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement and 6000 MHz. The Prefilter provides the necessary rejection of the unwanted signal. [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe]? Example Enable High Freq Prefilter for the Complex Spectrum Measurement in BASIC Mode: :SPEC:PFIL ON...
Page 770 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.4 BW Opens the Bandwidth (BW) menu, which contains controls for "Res BW" on page "Video BW" on page 771. The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types, Gaussian and Flattop.
Page 771 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :OBW:BAND:AUTO? Notes For numeric entries, all RBW Types choose the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available RBW to the value entered The setting and querying of values depend on the current bandwidth type Couplings Sweep time is coupled to RBW.
Page 772 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Video BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of Video BW to "Res BW" on page 770. To decouple the resolution bandwidth, press the Auto/Man toggle on the Video BW control, or simply enter a different value for Video BW. When Video BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Auto/Man toggle on Video BW.
Page 773 RBW Filter Type Selects the type for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in HP/Agilent/Keysight spectrum analyzers were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart.
Page 774 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.5.1 Meas Display Contains controls for setting the display for the current Measurement, View or Window. x dB BW Boundaries On/Off Turns the x dB BW Boundaries On or Off. :DISPlay:OBWidth:WINDow[1]:XDB 0 | 1 | OFF | ON Remote Command :DISPlay:OBWidth:WINDow[1]:XDB? :DISP:OBW:WIND:XDB 1...
Page 775 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.5.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off.
Page 776 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Trace Annotation on/off is supported.
Page 777 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement The frequency annotations in any other associated display, such as in Active Function, Softkey label, Limit Editor, Amp Corr Editor and Marker Table are not changed. Frequency annotations that are not associated with the spectrum, such as RBW, IBW, Sweep Time, are excluded and they are shown regardless of this selection.
Page 778 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement *RST nor :SYSTem:PRESet enable the display) – and you are in remote operation, the display can be turned back on by pressing the Local or Esc keys, or by sending :SYSTem:DEFaults MISC :DISPlay:ENABle ON (neither *RST...
Page 779 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement View "Views" on page 715 User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect <alphanumeric>...
Page 780 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement be able to return easily to your original Basic View, you can save your edited View as a “User View”. Save Layout as New View Saves your new View as a User View. An alpha keyboard appears, which lets you name your new View;...
Page 781 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement rename a Predefined View” is generated If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; View SCPI cannot be used while Display is disabled” is generated Delete User View You can delete the current View if it is a User View.
Page 782 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement View Listing Query Returns a string containing a comma-separated list of names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:CATalog? Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:CAT? Example Notes Returns a quoted string of the available Views for the current measurement, separated by commas. The list includes names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement Example: "Normal,Trace Zoom,Spectrogram,Baseband,myView1,yourView1"...
Page 783 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.6.1 Settings Contains controls that pertain to the X-Axis parameters of the measurement. These parameters control how data on the vertical (X) axis is displayed and control instrument settings that affect the horizontal axis. Center Frequency Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule (when frequency Scale Type is set to linear).
Page 784 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Example Set Center Frequency to 50 MHz: :FREQ:CENT 50 MHz Increment Center Frequency by the value of CF Step: :FREQ:CENT UP Return the current value of Center Frequency: :FREQ:CENT? Notes Sets the RF, External Mixing or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input: –...
Page 785 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Center Frequency Presets The following table provides the Center Frequency Presets for the Spectrum Analyzer mode, and the Max Freq, for the various frequency options: Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset...
Page 786 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Input CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq (can't tune above) Input 1, all models 25.005 GHz 50.0 GHz 52 GHz Input 2, opt 585 42.505 GHz 85.0 GHz 86 GHz Input 2, opt 590 45.005 GHz...
Page 787 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :FREQ:RF:CENT? Notes This command is the same in all Modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So, the value is independent in each Mode and common across all the measurements in the Mode Dependencies If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Center Frequency such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message.
Page 788 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :FREQ:EMIX:CENT 60 GHz Example :FREQ:EMIX:CENT? Notes This command is the same in all Modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So, the value is independent in each Mode and common across all the measurements in the Mode Couplings When you return to External Mixing after using one of the other inputs (for example, RF), you return to the settings that you had when you left External Mixing.
Page 789 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Notes Span Auto Detector ([:SENSe]:OBWidth:FREQuency:SPAN:AUTO) is only available in the MSR, LTEAFDD/LTEATDD and 5GNR modes Dependencies The Auto Detect functionality is only available in the MSR, LTEAFDD/LTEATDD and 5GNR modes Preset Mode Value 3 MHz WCDMA...
Page 790 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? Example Increase the current center frequency value by 500 MHz: :FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz :FREQ:CENT UP :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes Preset and Max values depend on Hardware Options Dependencies Span, RBW, Center frequency If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to change the value of the center frequency...
Page 791 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Notes Preset and Max values depend on Hardware Options Dependencies Appears only in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Not available in External Mixing. In this case, the control is grayed-out and shows a value of zero. However, the value of CF Offset that was set for the RF Input is retained and is restored when you switch back to the RF Input Preset...
Page 792 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Full Span (Remote Command Only) Changes the Occupied Bandwidth Span to show the full frequency range of the instrument. It maximizes the span within a range but does not change Center Frequency. When using external mixing, it changes the displayed frequency span to the frequency range specified for the selected external mixing band.
Page 793 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.7.2 Settings The controls on this tab include the Marker active function and a radio button selection for the marker control mode (Normal/POSition, Delta or Off; see "Marker Mode" on page 794) for the selected marker, as well as additional functions that help you use markers.
Page 794 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Notes The query returns the marker’s absolute X-Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal, or the offset from the marker’s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta. The value is returned as a real number, not an integer, corresponding to the translation from X-Axis Scale units to trace points .
Page 795 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :CALC:OBW:MARK:MODE? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state POSition|DELTa|OFF Range Annotation Mkr # <X value> and <Marker value> upper right on graph When Marker Trace is Polar in WCDMA mode: Mkr # <Chip Value (RHO & QPSKEVM)/Symbol Value (CDP)>, <X value> and <Y value> upper right on graph Backwards Compatibility SCPI Command Sets or queries the state of a marker.
Page 796 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab allow you to move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with "Marker Delta" on page 796.
Page 797 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement The control is duplicated here to allow you to conveniently perform a peak search and change the marker’s control mode to Delta without having to access two separate menus. 3.4.7.4 Properties The controls on this tab are used to set certain properties of the selected marker. Marker Frequency This is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace.
Page 798 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Annunciation Appears in the marker label of a Delta marker Marker Trace Selects the trace on which you want your marker placed. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X- Axis Scale of the marker.
Page 799 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.8.1 Settings Contains frequently used Meas Setup functions to which you will want the fastest access. Avg/Hold Num Specifies the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result. The average is displayed at the end of each sweep. Initiates an averaging routine that averages the sweep points in several successive sweeps, resulting in trace smoothing.
Page 800 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement changed from to ON, Averaging state is automatically set to Preset State Saved ON|OFF Range [:SENSe]:EBWidth:AVERage[:STATe] Backwards Compatibility SCPI Average Mode Lets you set the averaging mode. EXPonential Measurement averaging continues using the specified number of averages to compute each averaged value.
Page 801 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Power Ref Lets you select Power Ref type: TPOWer Total Power Total power in the current span is displayed OBWPower OBW Power Occupied power is displayed When Power Ref type is changed, the annotation in the lower window and Remote Command SCPI Results also change.
Page 802 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement of the trace, and interpolating to find the point where the integrated power equals (1 – [Occ BW % Pwr]) / 2 (0.5% if, for example, the 99% occupied bandwidth is to be found) of the total power, frequency f1 is obtained.
Page 803 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement The spur avoidance function is not available for: – M9410A/11A with EP6 option at frequency above 6 GHz – M9415A/16A at frequency below 380 MHz and above 12.3 GHz – M9410E/11E/15E/16E at frequency below 380 MHz and above 25.9 GHz [:SENSe]:OBWidth:SAVoid[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:OBWidth:SAVoid[:STATe]?
Page 804 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Compatibility parameters. It is retained for backwards compatibility and is not recommended for making Notes measurements or new designs All Auto/Man parameter couplings in the measurement are set to Auto. This includes couplings that may be unavailable or grayed-out due to the current state. For example, in the Swept SA measurement, there is no Auto/Man coupling for RBW while in Zero Span.
Page 805 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – Zero span measurement Resolution Bandwidth – Zero span measurement Dwell Time Harmonics (SA Mode only) Parameters affected by Auto Couple are: – Resolution Bandwidth – Fundamental Frequency – Dwell Time – Range Table Resolution Bandwidths –...
Page 806 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.8.2 Limits Lets you set measurement limits and be alerted when they have been exceeded. Limit Enables you to turn on or off limit checking at the specified frequency. For results that fail the limit test, a red FAIL appears in the Meas Bar. :CALCulate:OBWidth:LIMit:FBLimit <freq>...
Page 807 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved OFF|ON Range Min/Max 1 kHz/Depends on instrument maximum frequency 3.4.8.3 Meas Standard Contains controls that allow you to preset the PowerSuite measurements to conform to various communications standards. Radio Standard Presets Lets you specify the Radio Standard to be used.
Page 808 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :RAD:STAN:DEV? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state BTS|MS Range Chart for Standard and Available Measurements Note that not every measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode is available for every standard. The chart below describes which measurements are available for each Radio Standard.
Page 809 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Swept CCDF Burst Spurious List Power Emission Sweep W-LAN HiperLAN/2 TETRA DVB-T L/SECAM/NICA FCC Part 15 Subpart F DVBT-T G/PAL/NICAM DVB-T I/PAL/NICAM S-DMB System UWB Indoor General Radio Standards The table below lists the settings and provides an example for each general Radio Standard.
Page 810 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement DVB-T L/SECAM/NICAM Command Example :RAD:STAN DVBTLSN 7.61 MHz Span 24 MHz 3.9 kHz Auto rules Sweep Points 8001 DVB-T G/PAL/NICAM Command Example :RAD:STAN DVBTGPN 7.61 MHz Span 24 MHz 3.9 kHz Auto rules Sweep Points 8001 DVB-T I/PAL/NICAM...
Page 811 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3GPP W-CDMA Command Example :RAD:STAN W3GPP 5 MHz Span 7.5 MHz 240 kHz Auto rules RRC Filter RRC Filter Alpha 0.22 3GPP LTE 1.4 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN LTEB1M4 1.4 MHz Span 2.1 MHz Auto rules Auto rules...
Page 812 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3GPP LTE 20 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN LTEB20M 20 MHz Span 30 MHz Auto rules Auto rules cdma2000 Command Example :RAD:STAN C20001X :RAD:STAN C2000MC1 :RAD:STAN? (Query always returns C20001X) 1.23 MHz Span 1.845 MHz 24 kHz Auto rules...
Page 813 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Query always returns IS97D 1.23 MHz Span 1.845 MHz 24kHz Auto rules Band Class (IS-97D/98D only) The following function is only available when you have selected the standard: IS- 97D/98D. It lets you select the band class. [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:BAND:CLASs BC0 | BC1 Remote Command...
Page 814 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement WLAN 802.11n 20 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11N20M 20 MHz Span 30 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11n 40 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11N40M 40 MHz Span 60 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ac 20 MHz Command Example...
Page 815 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement WLAN 802.11ax 40 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AX40M 40 MHz Span 60 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ax 80 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AX80M 80 MHz Span 120 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ax 160 MHz Command Example...
Page 816 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement WLAN 802.11be 320 MHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11BE320M 320 MHz Span 480 MHz 100 kHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ad 2 GHz Command Example :RAD:STAN WL11AD2G 2.16 GHz Span 3.24 GHz 1 MHz Auto rules WLAN 802.11ay 2.16 GHz Command Example...
Page 817 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :RAD:STAN HIPERLAN2 WLAN HiperLAN/2 Command Example UWB Indoor Command Example Bluetooth Command Example Packet Type (Bluetooth only) The command below sets the packet type for the Bluetooth measurement [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:PACKet DH1 | DH3 | DH5 Remote Command [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard:PACKet?
Page 818 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 366 µs 1622 µs 2870 µs Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state DH1|DH3|DH5 Range Radio Standard Presets Hierarchy General None TETRA FCC Part 15 Subpart F APCO-25 dPMR Video DVB-T L/SECAM/NICAM G/PAL/NICAM I/PAL/NICAM S-DMB System E...
Page 819 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Cellular 3GPP 5G NR FR1 100 MHz FR1 100 MHz 3GPP LTE 1.4 MHz (6 RB) 3 MHz (15 RB) 5 MHz (25 RB) 10 MHz (50 RB) 15 MHz (75 RB) 20 MHz (100 RB) 1.4 MHz (6 RB) 3 MHz (15 RB)
Page 820 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Wireless W-LAN 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n 20 MHz 40 MHz 802.11ac 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 802.11ax 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 802.11be 20 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 160 MHz 320 MHz...
Page 821 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3. Compute the greater of the Reference and Offset A integration bandwidths. Divide that result by 100 and call it the ChannelWidthGoalRBW 4. Find the smallest integration bandwidth of any of the offsets; divide it by two and call the result IntegBWGoalRBW 5.
Page 822 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.8.4 Advanced Contains controls for setting advanced functions of the instrument. This tab does not appear in EXM, nor in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A. Noise Floor Extension Lets you configure Noise Floor Extension (NFE). All Modes that support NFE let you set it on or off.
Page 823 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement As shown in the table above, the On state (in Modes that do not support Adaptive NFE) matches the Full state in Modes that do support Adaptive NFE. To maintain SCPI backwards compatibility, the existing command to turn NFE on or off is retained, and a new command is added to set the state to turn AdaptiveON OFF:...
Page 824 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement settings with high degrees of variance reduction through some variant of averaging. When the potential improvement is small, the display acts like the fully-off case, and when it is high, it acts like the fully-on case, and in-between, application is a compromise between attractiveness and effectiveness.
Page 825 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement For all other cases, the SCPI command below is accepted without error, but has no effect. [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor:ADAptive ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor:ADAptive? Example First turn NFE on, this is Full mode :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Then set it to Adaptive :CORR:NOIS:FLO:ADAP ON...
Page 826 Recalibration of Noise Floor In instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated noise floor used by Noise Floor Extension should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year. To do this, use "Characterize Noise Floor"...
Page 827 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement If you cancel, you will be prompted again the next time you turn NFE on. If you postpone, you will be prompted again after a week passes and you then turn NFE IF Gain Sets the IF Gain function to one of: Setting...
Page 828 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.8.5 Global The controls in this menu apply to all Modes in the instrument. Some controls (for example, "Global Center Freq" on page 2034) allow you to switch certain Meas Global parameters to a Mode Global state. These switches apply to all Modes that support global settings.
Page 829 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Global EMC Std When this control is switched ON, the current Mode’s EMC Std is copied into the Global EMC Std, and from then on all Modes that support global settings use the Global EMC Std, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the EMC Std remains unchanged.
Page 830 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :INSTrument:COUPle:LLINe? Command :INST:COUP:LLIN ALL | NONE Example :INST:COUP:LLIN? Preset Set to on Global Settings, Restore Defaults and System, Restore Defaults, All Modes ALL | NONE Range Extend Low Band The software maintains a Mode Global value called Extend Low Band. Under the current sweep configuration crossing over two bands, when Extend Low Band is turned ON, the instrument checks whether one band can cover the whole sweep frequency range or not.
Page 831 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.9 Sweep Accesses controls to configure and control the acquisition of data, and the X-axis parameters of the instrument. Depending on the selected mode and measurement, these controls might include: Sweep Time, Continuous/Single, Pause/Resume, X Scale and Number of Points. 3.4.9.1 Sweep/Control Accesses controls that let you operate the sweep and control functions of the instrument, such as Sweep Time and Continuous/Single.
Page 832 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement of signal acquisition time, FFT time, and other overhead time, to complete the entire span of the measurement. If you need to specify the same “Sweep Time” [:SENSe]:<meas>:SWEep:TIME as you would for sweeping hardware, send <time>.
Page 833 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement A “#” mark appears before “Sweep” in the annotation when it is switched from Auto to Manual coupling Status Bits/OPC Meas Uncal is Bit 0 in the register: dependencies STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated Auto Function [:SENSe]:<meas>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command...
Page 834 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :CHP:SWE:ACQ:TIME? Dependencies Available only on non-sweeping hardware Couplings Coupled to Span, RBW, and VBW when in the Auto state When you manually set a value when in the Auto state, the state automatically changes to Man Preset Automatically calculated State Saved...
Page 835 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – A line with an arrow is Single – A loop with an arrow is Continuous Backwards X-Series A-models had Single and Cont hardkeys in place of the SweepSingleCont softkey. In the X- Compatibility Series A-models, if in single measurement, the Cont hardkey (and INIT:CONT...
Page 836 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement does not restart the sweep or sequence if the sweep is not in the idle state (for example, if you are taking a very slow sweep, or the instrument is waiting for a trigger).
Page 837 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Notes restart Max Hold and Min Hold In X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the :INIT:REST command restart not only Trace Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well More Information The Restart function first aborts the current sweep or measurement as quickly as possible.
Page 838 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement For slow sweeps (see Trace Update section in Trace/Detector), the traces are updated real-time during the sweep. There may be a special circumstance in application mode measurements where an exception is made and the traces and/or results need to be blanked before displaying the new results.
Page 839 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :INITiate:PAUSe Remote Command :INITiate:RESume :INIT:PAUS Example :INIT:RES Dependencies Not displayed in Modes that do not support pausing Annotation Only on control Abort (Remote Command Only) Stops the current measurement. Aborts the current measurement as quickly as possible, resets the sweep and trigger systems, and puts the measurement into an "idle"...
Page 840 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement The value returned is the estimated turnaround time of each measurement cycle, in seconds. The turnaround time is the sum of the signal acquisition time, FFT time, and other overhead time, to complete the entire span of each measurement cycle. [:SENSe]:<meas>:SWEep:ETIMe? Remote Command <meas>...
Page 841 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Points Sets the number of points taken per sweep, and displayed in the traces. The current value of points is displayed parenthetically, next to the sweep time in the lower-right corner of the display. Using more points provides greater resolution. Using fewer points compacts the data and decreases the time required to access a trace over the remote interface.
Page 842 IF Dithering Lets you turn IF Dithering on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to enhance the rejection of images and internally-generated spurious signals. [:SENSe]:SWEep:IF:DITHer OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 843 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.10 Trace Lets you control the acquisition, display, storage, detection and manipulation of trace data for the available traces. "Trace Control" on page 1926 tab of this menu contains radio-button selections for the trace type (Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold, Min Hold) and View/Blank setting for the selected trace.
Page 844 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement If any Trace is in View mode (displaying but not updating) and instrument settings are changed, the Invalid Data Indicator will display as long as that trace remains in View. Traces that are blanked do not turn on the Invalid Data Indicator. Not all instrument settings require display of the invalid data indicator when they change;...
Page 845 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement If you now tap or click on one of the items in this menu, the instrument will perform the corresponding function. Peak Search finds the highest peak on the selected Trace. Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold set the "Trace Type"...
Page 846 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement In this menu, Peak Search works as above. Peak Search all Traces finds the highest peak in the Waterfall window. Add Marker Here takes the lowest numbered Marker that is currently Off and turns it On as a Normal marker in the Waterfall window at the point where you right-clicked (or touched-and-held).
Page 847 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Top Line On the top line, each trace number is shown, in the trace color. A box is drawn around the currently selected trace. Middle Line Below each trace number, is a letter signifying the trace type for that trace number, where Clear/Write Trace Average...
Page 848 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – Trace 1: Visible, being updated, in Clear/Write, with Normal detector auto selected – Trace 2: Visible, being updated, in Clear/Write, being written to with a math function – Trace 3: Visible, not updating, data was taken in Max Hold, with the peak detector auto selected –...
Page 849 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.10.1 Select Trace Specifies the selected trace, which is the trace that will be affected when you change trace settings. Select Trace appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the menu panel.
Page 850 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Type There are four trace Types: Option Parameter SCPI Example Details WRITe :TRAC2:TYPE WRIT Clear/Write See: "Clear/Write" on page 853 AVERage :TRAC2:TYPE AVER Trace Average See: "Trace Average" on page 853 MAXHold :TRAC3:TYPE MAXH Maximum Hold...
Page 851 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Mode Backwards Compatibility Commands In earlier instruments, the “Trace Modes” were: Clear/Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View and Blank. Averaging was global to all traces and was controlled under the BW/Avg menu. In X-Series, trace averaging can be done on a per-trace basis.
Page 852 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – :TRACe:MODE MINHold sets :TRACe:TYPE MINHold (Min Hold). It also sets :TRACe:UPDate :TRACe:DISPlay ON, for the selected trace – :TRACe:MODE VIEW :TRACe:UPDate OFF, :TRACe:DISPlay ON, for the selected sets trace – :TRACe:MODE BLANk sets :TRACe:UPDate OFF,...
Page 853 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Type Details Clear/Write Each trace update replaces the old data in the trace with new data. Pressing Clear/Write for the selected trace, or sending :TRAC:TYPE WRIT for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Clear/Write and clears the trace, even if you are already in Clear/Write.
Page 854 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – Once the new sweep starts, the trace is overwritten with current trace data as the first trace of the new average Remember that restarting averaging also restarts Max Hold and Min Hold, as there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 855 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement – The average/hold count k is set to 1, so that the next time the min hold trace is displayed it simply represents one trace of new data – A new sweep is initiated Remember that restarting Min Hold also restarts Max Hold and averaging, because there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 856 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement See: "More Information" on page 857 Notes For the commands to control the two variables, Update and Display, see "Trace Update State On/Off" on page 856 "Trace Display State On/Off" on page 856 below Dependencies When Signal ID is on, this key is grayed-out...
Page 857 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:DISPlay[:STATe]? where <meas> is the identifier for the current measurement Example Make trace 1 visible: :TRAC2:DISP 1 Blank trace 3: :TRAC3:DISP 3 Couplings Whenever you set Update to for any trace, the Display is set to for that trace Preset...
Page 858 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Note that putting a trace into Display=OFF and/or Update=OFF does not restart the sweep and does not restart Averaging or Hold functions for any traces. 3.4.10.3 Math Lets you turn on and configure Trace Math functions. Math Function Trace Math functions perform mathematical operations between traces and, in some cases, user-specified offsets.
Page 859 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Sets Trace 3 to Log Offset trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, leaves the Second Trace operand (for Trace 3) unchanged (it is irrelevant for this function) and sets the Log Offset (for Trace 3) to -6 dB :CALC:MATH TRACE3,LDIF,TRACE1,TRACE2,0,-6.00 Sets Trace 3 to Log Diff trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, sets...
Page 860 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement and the function is annotated on the trace if Trace Annotation is on Status Bits/OPC *OPC can be used to detect the completion of a sweep, which will also correspond to the completion dependencies of the math operation, since all math takes place during the sweep Trace Math Options...
Page 861 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Power Sum (Op1 + Op2) Calculates a power sum between the First Trace operand and the Second Trace operand and puts the result in the destination trace. During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operands, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace.
Page 862 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement B+DL function in some older instruments. The Reference is entered on the Reference control, which only appears when this math function is in force for the selected trace. Each destination trace has its own reference. During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operands, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace.
Page 863 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 864 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 865 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 866 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Option Behavior and the trace averaging function For details, see "Detector Select Auto/Man" on page 867 NORMal The detector determines the peak of the CW-like signals, and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise-like signals. This is also referred to as Rosenfell detection AVERage The detector determines the average of the signal within the sweep points, using...
Page 867 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Type Query Returns: WRITe NORMal AVERage AVERage MAXHold POSitive MINHold NEGative AVERage Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state NORMal|AVERage|POSitive|SAMPle|NEGative|RMS Range Detector Select Auto/Man Sets the Detector mode to Auto (ON) or Man (OFF). In Auto, the proper detector is chosen based on rules that take into account the measurement settings and other instrument settings.
Page 868 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement From Trace Selects the trace to be copied to or exchanged with the "To Trace" on page 1752 when a "Copy" on page 1752 "Exchange" on page 1753 is performed Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace"...
Page 869 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement Exchange Executes a Trace Exchange based on the "From Trace" on page 1752 "To Trace" on page 1752 parameters. The From Trace and To Trace values are exchanged with each other. The action is performed once. The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace.
Page 870 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.4 Occupied BW Measurement 3.4.10.6 Advanced Contains controls for setting advanced trace functions of the instrument. Measure Trace Specifies which trace’s scalar results are displayed in the Metrics window, and :READ :FETCh retrieved by sending a query: –...
Page 871 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5 ACP Measurement ACP is a measurement of the amount of interference, or power, in an adjacent frequency channel. The results are displayed as a bar graph or as spectrum data, with measurement data at specified offsets. Measurement Commands The general functionality of "CONFigure"...
Page 872 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Results Returned page 879 Returns <Num Pts> comma-separated scalar values representing the Y values in Trace 1 Returns <Num Pts> comma-separated scalar values representing the Y values in Trace 2 Returns <Num Pts> comma-separated scalar values representing the Y values in Trace 3 Dependent on Mode and "Measurement Type"...
Page 873 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Results Returned Measurement Type Item Unit, if any TPRef Relative power or PSDRef Relative PSD TPRef Absolute power PSDRef Absolute PSD dBm/Hz, dBm/MHz* TPRef Reference power PSDRef Reference PSD dBm/Hz, dBm/MHz* Reference Index 1 Reference Index 2 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)
Page 874 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.1 Measurement Results for n = 1, or no Index Specified Mode = SA, Radio Std = None, Number of carriers = 1, Only Offset A is On Returns 3 comma-separated values that correspond to: Item Unit, if Reference carrier power...
Page 875 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Conditions Results Item Unit, if any Lower offset A - relative power Lower offset A - absolute power Upper offset A - relative power Upper offset A - absolute power Lower offset B - relative power Lower offset B - absolute power Upper offset B - relative power Upper offset B - absolute power...
Page 876 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Measurement Type = Power Spectral Density Reference Conditions Results Mode: LTEAFDD, For the trace specified by "Measure Trace" on page 1754, returns comma-separated scalar LTEATDD, 5GNR, MSR results in the following order: "Power Ref" on page Item Unit, if any 1056:...
Page 877 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Conditions Results Item Unit, if any Upper offset B - relative power Upper offset B - absolute power dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz* When "Max Num of Offsets" on page 1010 is 6, returns 28 results (Offset A-F: 28 = 4 + 4*6) and when set to 12, returns 52 results (Offset A-L: 52 = 4 + 4 * 12) *The unit is determined by "PSD Unit"...
Page 878 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Item Result Unit, if any Upper offset B Absolute power … When "Max Num of Offsets" on page 1010 is 6, returns 48 results (Offset A-F: 48 = 24 + 4*6) and when set to 12, returns 72 results (Offset A-L: 72 = 24 + 4 * 12) If any result is not available, -999.0 is returned Measurement Type = Power spectral density reference For the trace specified by...
Page 879 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.3 Measurement Results for n = 3 For the trace specified by "Measure Trace" on page 1754, returns scalar pass/fail values (0 = passed, or 1 = failed) determined by comparing the relative to the reference carrier and by testing the absolute power limit of the offset frequencies (measured as total power in dB if "Measurement Type"...
Page 880 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Measurement Type = Total power reference For the trace specified by "Measure Trace" on page 1754, returns (2 * Number of Carriers) comma-separated scalar results in the following order: Channel Result Unit, if any Channel (1) Relative power Channel (1)
Page 881 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Item Unit, if any page 881) Inner Lower offset A - relative power Inner Lower offset A - absolute power dBm, dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz* Inner Upper offset A - relative power Inner Upper offset A - absolute power dBm, dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz* Inner Lower offset B - relative power...
Page 882 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Power Ref Setting Option Reference Power #1 Reference Power #2 dBm, dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz* dBm, dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz* Others Reference carrier power dBm, dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz* *For PSD results, the unit is determined by "PSD Unit"...
Page 883 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement View Selection by Number (Remote Command Only) Selects the results view. The following command allows you to select the desired measurement view numerically. :DISPlay:ACPower:VIEW:NSELect <integer> Remote Command For view numbers, see table above :DISPlay:ACPower:VIEW:NSELect? :DISP:ACP:VIEW:NSEL 1 Example...
Page 884 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement The results of the measurement can be displayed as a single spectrum trace view or displayed with a Bar Graph trace on the spectrum trace. The Graph window appears in several Views, as follows: View Size Position...
Page 885 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Metrics Window in Carrier Info view: The text window displays the following results: Total Carrier Power This is the total power of all the carriers with carrier power present set to yes. The power is calculated by integrating across the bandwidth declared by the Carrier Integ BW parameter for each carrier and then totaling the sums.
Page 886 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement present, the power will be relative to the reference carrier. The power is calculated by integrating across the bandwidth declared by the Carrier Integ BW parameter. The integration bandwidth is shown as part of the result. This is the value of the Carrier Integ BW for the carrier unless the RRC Filter is on, then the integration bandwidth used is the displayed value, which is (1 + alpha)/T where T = 1/(Carrier Integ BW).
Page 887 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Shows the offset frequency from the carrier reference frequency in multi-carrier measurements. The carrier frequency display type determines whether the relative frequency or absolute frequency will be displayed. Sub-block For intra-band non-contiguous spectrum operation, the sub-block concept is introduced, which refers to one contiguous allocated block of spectrum for transmission and reception in the intra-band non-contiguous aggregation mode.
Page 888 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.8.1 Y Scale Contains controls that pertain to the Y axis parameters of the measurement. These parameters control how data on the vertical (Y) axis is displayed and control instrument settings that affect the vertical axis. Ref Value Sets the value for the absolute power reference.
Page 889 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Couplings Coupled to "Scale Range" on page 1556 as follows: Scale/Div = Scale Range/10 (number of divisions) is ON, this value is automatically determined by the measurement When "Auto Scaling" on page 896 result When you change a value, Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Preset...
Page 890 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement For measurements that support both Log and Lin scales, the instrument retains the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin amplitude Display Scales. For example, if Display Scale has been set to Log, and you set Y Axis Unit to dBm, pressing Display Scale (Log) sets the Y Axis Unit to dBm.
Page 891 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Unit Example Notes :UNIT:POW W Y Axis Unit is set to W :UNIT:POW V Y Axis Unit is set to V :UNIT:POW A Y Axis Unit is set to A dBmV :UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBmV DBUV dBmA :UNIT:POW...
Page 892 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Unit Example Notes (Transducer for that Correction is not None Unit) "Transducer Unit" on page 893 dBpT :UNIT:POW Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpT (dB DBPT relative to one picotesla). This selection is only available if a Correction is turned on, (Transducer and the Transducer Unit for that Correction is not None Unit)
Page 893 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely as 5.
Page 894 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement And on the control it looks like this: If a Transducer Unit is set, it is displayed as Xducer Unit in the Y Axis Unit NOTE dropdown. However, you can only change the Transducer Unit via the Edit Correction dialog in the Input/Output, Corrections menu.
Page 895 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement The on/off switch turns Ref Level Offset on and off. Setting a value for Ref Level Offset turns Ref Level OffsetON. For more on using offsets, see the Ref Level Offset control description for the Swept SA measurement.
Page 896 Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are unaffected by Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 897 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 898 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Attenuation menu says Mech Atten you have the Dual-Attenuator configuration. If the first control says Atten you have the Single-Attenuator configuration. (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states.
Page 899 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Only valid values are 0, 6, 14, 20 dB Annotation When the Input is RF, and the Input Port is RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed: On the Meas Bar, the field “Atten” displays as follows: –...
Page 900 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement In Dual-Attenuator configurations, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, the mechanical attenuator has no auto setting, and the Auto/Man toggle function is not available. The state of Auto/Man is remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled. This is described in more detail in "Elec Atten"...
Page 901 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement The e letter is in amber in Single-Attenuator configurations For example: Dual-Attenuator configuration: Atten: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the electronic attenuation is at 14 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: A: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the “soft”...
Page 902 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Note that in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator, this switch is only shown when the Electronic Attenuator is disabled. In other measurements, Mech Atten has no Auto/Man function. In these measurements, no switch is shown on the Mech Atten control: Mech Atten also appears with no switch, as above, in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator but when the Electronic Attenuator is enabled.
Page 903 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement control and the Meas Bar The electronic attenuator, and the “soft” attenuation function provided in Single-Attenuator config- urations, are unavailable above the low band (0-3.6 GHz, 0-3.4 GHz, 0-3 GHz, depending on the model). If the low band range is from 0-3.6 GHz, and Stop Frequency of the instrument is > 3.6 GHz, then the Enabled/Disabled section of the Elec Atten control will be and grayed-out "Internal Preamp"...
Page 904 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :POW:EATT:STAT? Preset (Disabled) for Swept SA measurement (Enabled) for all other measurements that support the electronic attenuator The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band can change based on the NOTE selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it).
Page 905 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement – The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation Examples in the Dual-Attenuator configuration: –...
Page 906 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI, and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known.
Page 907 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping If this function is ON, it applies the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1963 each time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous measurement mode, it only executes before the first measurement. In Dual-Attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both attenuators participate in the autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the mechanical attenuator does not participate in the autoranging.
Page 908 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Range Dual-Attenuator models: Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten Single-Attenuator models: Off | On Backwards Compatibility Command Notes aliases to "Elec Atten Only" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT ELEC) aliases to "Off" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT OFF) :POW:RANG:AUTO? returns true if...
Page 909 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1963 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 907 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 910 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 911 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 907 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 912 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]? :POW:ATT:STEP 2 Example :POW:ATT:STEP? Notes Has a toggle control on the front panel, but takes a specific value (in dB) when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10 Dependencies Blanked in EXA, CXA and CXA-m if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present.
Page 913 Example Dependencies Only appears in the Swept SA and RTSA measurements NORM Preset 3.5.8.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 914 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC. For signals with high peak-to- average ratios, the range may need to exceed the rms signal power by a significant amount to avoid clipping.
Page 915 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation OFF | ON | ELECtrical | Remote Command COMBined [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes Because there is no attenuator control available in these models, the control displays only choices. However, for SCPI compatibility with other platforms, all three parameters (ELECtrical, COMBined, and ON) are honored and all are mapped to ELECtrical, so if any of these three parameters is sent, a subsequent query will return ELEC...
Page 916 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :POW:RANG:PAR 12 dB Example Notes In some Modes, this parameter is read-only; meaning the value will appear on the control and query via SCPI, but is not changeable. In such applications the control is grayed-out. Attempts to change the value via SCPI are ignored, but no error message is generated Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode...
Page 917 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement In general, only appears in instruments whose hardware supports this signal routing. For example, this tab does not appear in many of the modular instrument products, including VXT Model M9420A, or UXM. This tab does appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E, because "Software Preselection"...
Page 918 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement centering is completed The offset applied to do the centering appears in "Preselector Adjust" on page 1979 Status Bits/OPC When centering the preselector, *OPC does not return true until the process is complete and a dependencies subsequent measurement has completed, nor are results returned in response to :READ...
Page 919 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :POW:PADJ? Notes The value on the control is displayed to 0.1 MHz resolution – Does not appear in CXA-m Dependencies – Does not appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A – Does not appear in M9410E/11E/15E/16E –...
Page 920 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement for a preamp with a 9 kHz lowest specified frequency: "Preamp: Accy unspec’d below 9 kHz". Selection Example Note :POW:GAIN OFF Low Band :POW:GAIN ON Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band :POW:GAIN:BAND preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band...
Page 921 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement says “3.6 GHz”. If it is a 13.6 GHz preamp and it is set to Full Range the annotation says “13.6 GHz” When the USB Preamp is connected to USB, the Preamp annotation says “Preamp: USB” if the internal preamp is off or “Preamp: USB, Int”...
Page 922 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement More Information When LNA is installed, the preamp annotation changes to show the state of both LNA and Internal Preamp. Below is an example: Note that when operating entirely in the low band (below about 3.6 GHz), if LNA is on, Internal Preamp is switched off (even if you have its switch set to ON).
Page 923 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does Low Noise Path Enable, but the preamp’s compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of Low Noise Path Enable.
Page 924 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement In any of these cases, if the required options are not present and the SCPI command is sent, error - 241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are grayed-out if the current measurement does not support them Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are not supported in Avionics and MMR Modes (non- modulation measurements).
Page 925 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement This allows the function to automatically switch based on certain Auto Rules as shown below: VMA Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Digital Demod Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in which case choose Preselector Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Presel Bypass...
Page 926 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in Analysis which case choose Full Bypass if conditions warrant(FBP Option is available and “Allow Full Bypass in Auto”...
Page 927 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Low Noise Path Enable Low Noise Path Enable provides a lower noise floor under some circumstances, particularly when operating in the 21–26.5 GHz region. With the Low Noise Path enabled, the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp are bypassed whenever all the following are true: –...
Page 928 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement range of the preamp path is too little and the noise floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range The graph below illustrates the concept. It shows, in red, the performance of an instrument at different attenuation settings, both with the preamp on and off, in a measurement that is affected by both instrument noise and instrument TOI.
Page 929 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement µW Preselector Bypass Toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the normal path for the instrument.
Page 930 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement interface. Also, if the preamp is turned on, the Low Noise Path is not used, whether or not the Full Bypass Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Full Bypass Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (>...
Page 931 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Preselector and Bandwidth Conflict When the Frequency Extender Preselector is applied and the signal bandwidth is greater than 2.5 [GHz], then a settings alert message will show to warn the user that the signal may be distorted due to the limitation of the Frequency Extender Preselector bandwidth.
Page 932 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement N9042B+V3050A Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector. Since the microwave preselector only goes up to 50 GHz, software preselection must be used to suppress and separate images above 50 GHz. The specific algorithm used for software preselection is specified by the SW Preselection Type selection –...
Page 933 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Preset N9041B N9042B+V3050A M9410A/11A State Saved Saved in instrument state SW Preselection Type Specifies the algorithm used for software preselection. Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N.
Page 934 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement SW Preselection BW Specifies the effective bandwidth to be used for Software Preselection. The options are: – NORMal – when making Swept measurements, a software preselection algorithm is used which takes up to 4 background acquisitions, then post-processes the result.
Page 935 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement and 6000 MHz. The Prefilter provides the necessary rejection of the unwanted signal. [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe]? Example Enable High Freq Prefilter for the Complex Spectrum Measurement in BASIC Mode: :SPEC:PFIL ON...
Page 936 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.9 BW Opens the BW menu, which contains controls for the Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth functions of the instrument. The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types, Gaussian and Flattop.
Page 937 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Modes Values IBW 220 kHz IBWR 30 kHz WCDMA IBW 100 kHz IBWR 27 kHz FAST 390 kHz When Meas Method is FPOWer and Fast Power RBW mode is “Best Speed,” RBW is calculated as follows: RBW = Span ×...
Page 938 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Mode Preset Value WCDMA 100 kHz 100 kHz 220 kHz 5GNR 100 kHz More Information When Res BW is set to Auto, the bandwidth selected depends on "RBW Filter Type" on page 940. Only certain discrete resolution bandwidths are available.
Page 939 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Normally, Video BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Video BW to "Res BW" on page 936. To decouple the resolution bandwidth, press the Auto/Man toggle on the Video BW control, or simply enter a different value for Video BW. When the Video BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Auto/Man toggle on the Video BW control.
Page 940 Selects the type for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in HP/Agilent/Keysight spectrum analyzers were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart.
Page 941 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement RBW Filter BW Selects a Gaussian filter based on its –3 dB (Normal) bandwidth or its –6 dB bandwidth. [:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth:TYPE DB3 | DB6 Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth:TYPE? :ACP:BAND:TYPE DB3 Example :ACP:BAND:TYPE? Dependencies Disabled when "RBW Filter Type"...
Page 942 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state OFF|ON Range :DISPlay:ACPower:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:BGRaph Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.5.10.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode.
Page 943 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :DISP:ANN:SCR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed-out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the...
Page 944 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Frequency Annotation Turns on and off the absolute frequency annotation in the main display for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Frequency Annotation on/off is supported. The affected annotations include Center Frequency, Start/Stop Frequency, Frequency Offset, Marker Frequency.
Page 945 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 1. To increase speed as much as possible by freeing the instrument from having to update the display 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3. For security purposes If you have turned off the display: –...
Page 946 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Set by :SYST:DEF MISC, but not affected by *RST :SYSTem:PRESet State Saved Not saved in instrument state Backwards :SYST:PRES no longer turns on :DISPlay:ENABle as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.5.10.3 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views.
Page 947 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Backwards The legacy node Compatibility :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State.
Page 948 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 949 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 950 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.11 Frequency Contains controls that allow you to control the Frequency and Channel parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements in the current Mode – they do not change as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global”...
Page 951 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer? Example Set Center Frequency to 50 MHz: :FREQ:CENT 50 MHz Increment the Center Frequency by the value of CF Step: :FREQ:CENT UP Return the current value of Center Frequency: :FREQ:CENT? Notes Sets the RF, External Mixing or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input...
Page 952 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset Preset above) 507 (CXA) 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.58 GHz 508 (all but MXE) 1.805 GHz 3.6 GHz 8.5 GHz 508 (MXE) 4.205 GHz 8.4 GHz 8.5 GHz...
Page 953 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq (can't tune above) CXA opt C75 0.7505 GHz 1.5 GHz 1.58 GHz 505 MHz 1 GHz 1.000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits (CXA only) Tracking Min Freq If above this Freq, Stop Freq...
Page 954 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :FREQ:RF:CENT 30 MHz Example :FREQ:RF:CENT? Notes This command is the same in all Modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So, the value is independent in each Mode and common across all the measurements in the Mode Dependencies If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Center Frequency such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message.
Page 955 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Stop frequencies are 26.5 and 40 GHz respectively. The center of these two frequencies is 33.25 GHz Therefore, after Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go to External Mixing and do a Mode Preset while in Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Center Frequency is 33.25 GHz State Saved The minimum frequency in the currently selected mixer band + 5 Hz...
Page 956 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:ACPower:FREQuency:SPAN <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:FREQuency:SPAN? :ACP:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHz Example :ACP:FREQ:SPAN? Notes In Bluetooth Mode, the value of Span has to be an odd MHz Dependencies If the electrical attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Span such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz results in an error In instruments with an RF Preselector, such as MXE, you cannot sweep across the band break at 3.6 GHz while the RF Preselector is on in Continuous sweep, as there is a mechanical switch that...
Page 957 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Freq Option Max Span (can't set higher than this) 503, F03 (CXA, CXA-m) 3.08 GHz 507 (all but CXA) 7.1 GHz 507 (CXA, CXA-m) 7.575 GHz 508 (all but MXE) 8.5 GHz 508 (MXE) 8.5 GHz 513, F13 13.8 GHz...
Page 958 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement CF Step Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for Center Frequency from remote commands) change the center frequency by the step-size value.
Page 959 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement center frequency, start frequency, stop frequency, and all other absolute frequency settings in the instrument including frequency count. When a frequency offset is entered, the value appears below the center of the graticule. To eliminate an offset, perform a Mode Preset, or set the frequency offset to 0 Hz.
Page 960 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement saving a State+Trace file, because the data and state are saved together. 3.5.12 Marker Accesses a menu that enables you to select, set up and control the markers for the current measurement. If there are no active markers, Marker selects marker 1, sets it POSition (Normal) and places it at the center of the display.
Page 961 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Marker Frequency Sets the marker X-Axis value in the current marker X-Axis Scale unit. Has no effect if the control mode is OFF, but is the SCPI equivalent of entering an X value if the POSition or DELTa.
Page 962 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state -9.9E+37 9.9E+37 Marker Y Axis Value (Remote Query only) Returns the marker Y-Axis value in the current marker Y-Axis unit. :CALCulate:ACPower:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:Y? Remote Command :CALC:ACP:MARK11:Y? Example POSition or DELTa. If the marker is OFF, Notes Returns the marker Y-axis result, if the control mode is the response is Not A Number...
Page 963 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Backwards Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker. Setting a marker that is (1) puts it in POSition mode and places it at the center of the screen. :CALC:ACP:MARK2:STAT ON Example :CALC:ACP:MARK2:STAT? Preset...
Page 964 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement This may result in markers going off screen. :CALCulate:ACPower:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate:ACPower:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? :CALC:ACP:MARK:COUP ON Example :CALC:ACP:MARK:COUP? Dependencies Unavailable when "Meas Method" on page 970 Preset Presets on Mode Preset and All Markers Off State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.5.12.3 Peak Search...
Page 965 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement returned after an unsuccessful search Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the peak that is next lower in amplitude than the current marker value. If the selected marker was OFF, then it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak search is performed.
Page 966 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement If the selected marker is OFF, it is turned on before the minimum search is performed. :CALCulate:ACPower:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:MINimum Remote Command :CALC:ACP:MARK:MIN Example Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker State Saved Not part of saved state Pk-Pk Search Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency (or time, if in zero span) differences between the highest and lowest Y-Axis value.
Page 967 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.12.4 Properties The controls on this tab are used to set certain properties of the selected marker. Marker Frequency This is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace. It is the same as "Marker Frequency"...
Page 968 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Marker Trace Selects the trace on which you want your marker placed. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X- Axis Scale of the marker.
Page 969 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement 3.5.13.1 Settings Contains frequently-used functions to which you will want the fastest access. Avg | Hold Number Specifies the number of measurement averages used to calculate the measurement result. The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep. After the specified number of average counts, the average mode (termination control) setting determines the average action.
Page 970 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved OFF|ON Range [:SENSe]:ACPR:AVERage[:STATe] Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:MCPower:AVERage[:STATe] Power Suite, W-CDMA Avg Mode Sets the Averaging Mode. This determines the averaging action after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) is reached. –...
Page 971 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement (max dynamic improving dynamic range on a W-CDMA signal because a sharp cutoff bandpass filter is used. The range) accuracy of the adjacent channel power ratio is not degraded by this method, but the absolute accuracy of both adjacent channel power and carrier power are degraded by up to about 0.5 dB The algorithm uses zero-span and an appropriate RBW setting to capture all of the power in the carrier channel and the offsets.
Page 972 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement MSR, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD and 5G NR Modes support only Integration BW, Filtered IBW and Fast Power methods Dependencies When RBW, FAST FPOWer is selected, Gate function is not available. If you try to turn GateON while Meas Method is RBW, FAST...
Page 973 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement – "Method for Carrier " on page 1018 – "Filter Alpha for Carrier" on page 1019 [:SENSe]:ACPower:CARRier[1]|2:LIST:COUPle OFF | ON | 0 | 1, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:CARRier[1]|2:LIST:COUPle? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:CARR:LIST:COUP OFF Example :ACP:CARR:LIST:COUP?
Page 974 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :ACP:CARR2:LIST:PPR? Notes Some Modes do not support Carrier subopcode 2. In those cases, commands with subopcode 2 are accepted without error but ignored When setting these values remotely, the position in the list sent corresponds to the carrier. Missing values are not permitted, so if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6.
Page 975 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Preset SA, WCDMA, LTE, LTETDD Modes 5 MHz Radio Test Mode 25 kHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 0 Hz/Depends on instrument maximum frequency. Same as the Max Span of Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:MCPower:CARRier[1]|2:LIST:WIDTh Backwards Compatibility...
Page 976 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Modes Value LTE, LTETDD 4.515 MHz|4.5 MHz Radio Test 25 kHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 10 Hz/Depends on instrument maximum frequency. Same as Max Span of the Swept SA Measurement [:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth:INTegration Backwards Compatibility...
Page 977 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Filter Alpha for Carrier Inputs the alpha value for the filter used in the current carrier configuration. [:SENSe]:ACPower:CARRier[1]|2:LIST:FILTer:ALPHa <real>, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:CARRier[1]|2:LIST:FILTer:ALPHa? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:CARR2:LIST:FILT:ALPH 0.5 Example :ACP:CARR2:LIST:FILT:ALPH? Notes...
Page 978 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement RTOCenter From either the lower or upper RF BW** edge frequency to the center frequency of each Offset Integ 5G NR Mode only RTOEdge From either the lower or upper RF BW** edge frequency to the closest edge frequency of each Offset Integ BW 5G NR Mode only RCTOCenter...
Page 979 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS:TYPE ETOC Example :ACP:OFFS:TYPE? CTOCenter Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state CTOCenter|CTOEdge|ETOCenter|ETOEdge Range Mode: 5G NR [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:TYPE CTOCenter | CTOEdge | ETOCenter | Remote ETOEdge | RTOCenter | RTOEdge | RCTOCenter | SCTOCenter Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:TYPE?
Page 980 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Diagram for Modes other than MSR, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR Spectrum Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 981 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Diagram for MSR, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR Note: RF BW Edge and Outermost Carrier Edge are not always the same. e.g.) 5G NR (3GPP) defines BW_channel, CA which calculates F_offset,high and F_ offset,low asymmetrically with SCS shift. (*) For MSR, F_offset,high (or ,low) = F_offset,RAT,high (or ,low) Offset Freq Determines the frequency difference between the center of the main channel and...
Page 982 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement The list contains up to six (6) entries, depending on the mode selected, for offset frequencies. Each offset frequency in the list corresponds to a reference bandwidth in the bandwidth list. An offset frequency of zero turns the display of the measurement for that offset off, but the measurement is still made and reported.
Page 983 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:STAT 1,1,0,0,0,0 Example :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:STAT? Preset When "Max Num of Offsets" on page 1010 is 12, the preset value of Offset G ~ L is the same as the Offset F value Modes Values...
Page 984 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Preset When "Max Num of Offsets" on page 1010 is set to 12, the preset value of Offset G ~ L is the same as the Offset F value Modes Values 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz|2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz, 2 MHz WCDMA 3.84 MHz, 3.84 MHz, 3.84 MHz, 3.84 MHz, 3.84 MHz, 3.84 MHz|3.84 MHz, 3.84...
Page 985 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:SIDE NEGative | BOTH | POSitive, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:SIDE? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS:LIST:SIDE BOTH Example :ACP:OFFS:LIST:SIDE? Notes Some Modes do not support Offset subopcode 2. In those cases, commands with subopcode 2 are accepted without error but ignored If you set in an offset, result of the inactive side returns -999...
Page 986 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Mode Values 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0 WCDMA 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 | 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR, MSR 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0 Radio Test 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0...
Page 987 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Res BW Sets the resolution bandwidth. If an unavailable bandwidth is entered with the numeric keypad, the closest available bandwidth is selected. [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth:RESolution <freq>,… Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth:RESolution? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:BAND:RES 220kHz,220kHz,220kHz,220kHz,220kHz,220kHz Example :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:BAND:RES?
Page 988 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2:LIST:BWIDth:RESolution:AUTO Backwards Compatibility SCPI Video BW Enables you to change the instrument post-detection filter (VBW). [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth:VIDeo <freq>,… Remote Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth:VIDeo? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:BAND:VID 5MHz,5MHz,5MHz,5MHz,5MHz,5MHz Example :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:BAND:VID? Notes The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after Mode Preset Some Modes do not support Offset subopcode 2.
Page 989 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2:LIST:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO Backwards Compatibility SCPI Filter Type Selects the type of bandwidth filter that is used. [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth:SHAPe GAUSsian | Remote Command FLATtop,… [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth:SHAPe? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:BAND:SHAP FLAT,GAUS,GAUS,GAUS,GAUS,GAUS Example :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:BAND:SHAP? Notes...
Page 990 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Dependencies When "RBW Filter Type" on page 940 is Flattop, or "Res BW" on page 936 Mode for the offset is Auto, this cell is grayed-out and disabled. Since Res BW Mode for the offset is preset to Auto on changing "Meas Method"...
Page 991 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:ABS -10,-10,-10,-10,-10,-10 Example :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:ABS? Notes Some Modes do not support Offset subopcode 2. In those cases, commands with subopcode 2 are accepted without error but ignored Preset When "Max Num of Offsets"...
Page 992 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:RCARrier? Command Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:RCAR 0,0,0,0,0,0 Example :ACP:OFFS2:LIST:RCAR? Notes Some Modes do not support Offset subopcode 2. In those cases, commands with subopcode 2 are accepted without error but ignored Preset When "Max Num of Offsets"...
Page 993 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Modes Values -45, -60, 0, 0, 0, 0 | -45, -60, 0, 0, 0, 0 WCDMA -44.2, -49.2, -49.2, -49.2, -49.2, -49.2 | -32.2, -42.2, -42.2, -42.2, - 42.2, -42.2 LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, -44.2,-44.2,-44.2,-44.2,-44.2,-44.2 | -29.2, -29.2, -29.2, -29.2, -29.2, -29.2 5G NR -43.8, -43.8, -43.8, -43.8, -43.8, -43.8 | -29.2, -29.2, -29.2, -29.2, -...
Page 994 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max -150.0/50.0 :CALCulate:MCPower:OFFSet:LIST:LIMit:NEGative[:UPPer]:DATA Backwards Compatibility (Power Suite, WCDMA) SCPI Rel Limit (PSD) Enters a relative limit value for the level of the power spectral density. This sets the amplitude levels to test against for any custom offsets.
Page 995 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max -150.0 dB/50.0 dB Fail Mask Accesses a menu that lets you select one of the logics for the fail conditions between the measurement results and the test limits. The setting defines the type of testing to be done at any custom offset frequencies.
Page 996 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Modes Values REL, REL, REL, REL, REL, REL Radio Test State Saved Saved in instrument state ABSolute|AND|OR|RELative Range [:SENSe]:MCPower:OFFSet[1]|2:LIST:TEST Backwards Compatibility SCPI Offset Frequency Define Allows you to select “Offset” definition: CTOCenter From the lowermost carrier center frequency (for lower offset), the uppermost carrier center frequency (for upper offset) to the center frequency of each Offset Integ BW CTOEdge From the lowermost carrier center frequency (for lower offset), the uppermost carrier center frequency...
Page 997 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement :ACP:OFFS:INN:TYPE ETOC Example :ACP:OFFS:INN:TYPE? STOCenter Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state CTOCenter|CTOEdge|ETOCenter|ETOEdge|STOCenter|STOEdge Range Mode: 5G NR [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:TYPE CTOCenter | CTOEdge | ETOCenter | Remote ETOEdge | STOCenter | STOEdge | SCTOCenter Command [:SENSe]:ACPower:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:TYPE? Subopcode: 1 = BTS/Downlink (Default), 2 = MS/Uplink :ACP:OFFS:INN:TYPE ETOC...
Page 998 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Diagram for Offset Freq Define Note: RF BW Edge and Outermost Carrier Edge are not always same. e.g.) 5G NR (3GPP) defines BW_channel,CA which calculates F_offset,high and F_ offset,low asymmetrically with SCS shift (*) For MSR, F_offset,high (or ,low) = F_offset,RAT,high (or ,low) Offset Freq Determines the frequency difference between the center of the main channel and...
Page 999 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Each Offset Freq state value is entered individually by selecting the desired carrier. Use the Enabled checkbox to turn the Offset Freq State on or off. The list contains up to 6 entries, depending on the mode selected, for offset frequencies.
Page 1000 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode 3.5 ACP Measurement Integ BW Sets the Integration Bandwidth for the offsets. Each resolution bandwidth in the list [:SENSe]:ACP:OFFSet corresponds to an offset frequency in the list defined by [n]:INNer:LIST[:FREQuency]. Enter each value individually by selecting the desired offset on the Offset menu key using the up down arrows, the knob, or the numeric keypad, then enter the Offset Integration Bandwidth using the Offset Integration Bandwidth menu key.

This manual is also suitable for:

M9410a M9411a M9415a M9416a N9000b N9010b ... Show all